Quarterlytics / Marshall Motor Holdings plc

Marshall Motor Holdings plc

mmh · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker mmh
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2018 Annual Report · Marshall Motor Holdings plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual Repor t &  
Accounts 2018 

P U T T I N G   O U R   C U S T O M E R S   A B O V E   A L L   E L S E   S I N C E   1 9 0 9

 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Contents

CHAIRMAN’S  
STATEMENT  

P8

OPERATING  
REVIEW 

P10

FINANCIAL 
REVIEW 

P22

STRATEGIC REPORT 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

Chairman’s Statement                                                     8 

Independent Auditor’s Report                                        62 

Operating Review                                                          10 

Financial Review                                                            22 

Principal Risks and Uncertainties                                  28 

GOVERNANCE 

Board of Directors                                                          32 

Directors’ Report                                                            34 

Corporate and Social Responsibility                              36 

Consolidated Financial Statements 

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income     72 

Consolidated Balance Sheet                                         73 

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity              74 

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement                              75 

Net Debt Reconciliation                                                 76 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements           77 

Corporate Governance Report                                      42 

Parent Company Financial Statements 

Audit Committee Report                                                 48 

Remuneration Committee Report                                  51 

Directors’ Remuneration Report                                    53 

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities                        61 

Parent Company Balance Sheet                                 133 

Parent Company Statement of Changes in Equity      134 

Notes to the Parent Company Financial Statements   135 

COMPANY INFORMATION                                         144 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT

Historical Financial Trends

Revenue  £m  
excluding discontinued leasing segment

Gross Profit  £m  
excluding discontinued leasing segment

£2,232.0m

£2,186.9m

£258.3m

£255.7m

£1,860.1m

£212.1m

£1,195.7m

£1,050.1m

£136.4m

£118.2m

2014 2015 2016

2017

2018

2014 2015 2016 2017

2018

CAGR 20.1%

CAGR 21.3%

Underlying Profit Before Tax* £m

Net Assets £m

£200.4m

£191.2m

£25.4m

£25.7m

£20.5m

£145.7m

£129.9m

£11.0m

£9.1m

£66.2m

2014 2015

2016 2017

2018

2014

2015 2016 2017

2018

CAGR 29.6%

CAGR 31.8%

* underlying profit before tax is presented  

excluding non-underlying items and discontinued  
leasing segment (see Note 7)

4

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

2018 Quick Overview

Revenue 

£2.2bn
£25.7m
89,515

Underlying Profit Before Tax 

New and Used Units Sold

£200.4m

Net Assets

120
3,749

Operating Units

Colleagues 
at 31 December 2018

No.1

AUTOMOTIVE  
RETAIL EMPLOYER

As Voted by our Colleagues

Range Rover Sport SVR

Putting our customers above all else since 1909.

5

7th

Largest Automotive Retailer

23

Brand Partners

120

Operating Units

27

Counties Nationwide

81.4 %

Brand Coverage

South Lakes

Scarborough

Blackpool

Harrogate

York

Preston

Blackburn

Leeds

Bolton

Hull

Scunthorpe

Motorrad

Grimsby

Lincoln

Nottingham

Grantham

Melton Mowbray

Leicester

Peterborough

Northampton

King’s Lynn

Vans

Halesworth

Bury St.  
Edmunds

St. Neots

Cambridge

Bedford

Milton Keynes

Trade Parts 
Specialist

Oxford

Letchworth

Ipswich

Knebworth

Welwyn

Bishop’s  
Stortford
Harlow

Braintree

Trade Parts 
Specialist

Swindon

Newbury

Commercial 
Vehicles

Andover

Reading

Approved 
Centre

Hook

Wimbledon

Sydenham

Trade Parts 
Specialist

Old Kent Rd
Bexley
Beckenham 
& Bromley

Barnstaple

DAS WELT

Bridgwater

Trade Parts 
Specialist

Taunton

Exeter

Salisbury

Trade Parts 
Specialist

Winchester

Mitcham
Coulsdon

Croydon

Southampton

Bournemouth
Poole

Commercial 
Vehicles

Fareham Commercial 
Portsmouth

Vehicles

Chichester

Commercial 
Vehicles

Plymouth

Commercial 
Vehicles

Audi all-electric PB18 e-tron

6

% 2018 
Manufacturer  
Market  
Share

Retail Franchised Dealerships

Motorrad

6.1

7.3

10.7

2.2

3.8

1.6

4.1

3.3

0.1

7.3

2.8

4.3

3.4

2.7

3.2

0.3

7.5

8.6

2.1

Commercial Vehicle Dealerships

Vans

Commercial 
Vehicles

Commercial 
Vehicles

Commercial 
Vehicles

Commercial 
Vehicles

Commercial 
Vehicles

Other Stand-Alone Operating Units

Trade Parts 
Specialist

Trade Parts 
Specialist

Trade Parts 
Specialist

Trade Parts 
Specialist

Trade Parts 
Specialist

Paint & 
 Body Repair 
Centre

Paint & 
 Body Repair 
Centre

Paint & 
 Body Repair 
Centre

Paint & 
 Body Repair 
Centre

Paint & 
 Body Repair 
Centre

Approved 
Centre

Used Car  
Centre

Commercial 
Vehicles

*acquired January 2019 
**acquired February 2019

7

Beckenham & Bromley, Bexley, 
Coulsdon, Exeter, Newbury, Oxford, 
Plymouth, Taunton and Wimbledon

Bournemouth, Grimsby (with Motorrad), 
Hook, Salisbury and Scunthorpe

Bury St Edmunds, Cambridge  
and Kings Lynn

Harrogate, Hull, South Leicester, 
Peterborough, Scarborough and York  

Cambridge

Cambridge, Ipswich, Lincoln,  
Newbury, Oxford and Peterborough  

Ipswich, Scunthorpe

Bedford, Cambridge, Ipswich, 
Lincoln, Melton Mowbray, Newbury  
Oxford and Peterborough

Peterborough

Blackburn, Blackpool, Bolton, Chichester, 
Portsmouth, Preston, Southampton, 
South Lakes and Winchester

Bournemouth, Grimsby,  
Hook and Salisbury   

Grantham and Lincoln

Cambridge, Peterborough  
and St Neots

Braintree, Cambridge  
and Leicester  

Barnstaple, Bedford**, Croydon, Harlow**,  
Leicester*, Letchworth**, Newbury, 
Northampton**, Nottingham*, Oxford

Blackpool, Bolton, Portsmouth  
and Southampton 

Ipswich, Knebworth, and  
Peterborough 

Barnstaple, Grimsby, Newbury, North 
Oxford, South Oxford, Reading, 
Scunthorpe and Taunton  
Bishops Stortford, Cambridge, Grantham, 
Leeds, Milton Keynes, Nottingham, 
Peterborough, and Welwyn Garden City 

Cambridge

Andover, Fareham, Poole  
and Southampton

Bridgwater, Oxford, Reading  
and Scunthorpe  

Exeter, Mitcham, Old Kent Road / 
Dartford, Oxford and Swindon

Cambridge, Greenham Prep Centre,  
Grimsby, New Forest and Peterborough

Audi Sydenham, Cambridge Used Cars 
and Halesworth Jaguar Land Rover

Croydon Service Centre

   
   
 
   
STRATEGIC REPORT

Chairman’s Statement

“The Group performed strongly 
in a challenging market”

Introduction 
I am delighted to present our Annual Report and Accounts 
(“Annual Report”) for the year ended 31 December 2018 
(the “Year”), my first since becoming Chairman of the Group 
on 1 January 2019. 

Whilst the market backdrop in 2018 remained challenging, 
the Group performed strongly. We are pleased to report a 
record  continuing  underlying  profit  before  tax*  (“PBT”) 
performance for the Year.  

I am excited to have joined the Group at this time in its 
development. The global automotive industry is undergoing 
unprecedented change, driven in large part by exciting new 
technologies, some of which I have been heavily involved 
with during my career.  

I have visited a number of our dealerships and met with 
many of our colleagues since I joined the Group and I have 
been very impressed with how the Group operates. 

Strategy 
The Group’s strategy of close partnership with major global 
automotive  brands  has  served  it  well  over  many  years, 
enabling it to grow significantly and become a leading UK 
automotive retailer. This strategy has positioned the Group 
well to continue its success and I very much look forward to 
being part of the leadership team to help deliver its future 
potential. We remain committed to our strategy of growing 
the Group further, both organically and through targeted 
acquisitions.  We continue to believe that those automotive 
retailers with both scale and a diverse portfolio will be best 
placed to succeed in a changing market.  

Results 
The Group has enjoyed another record year, delivering like-
for-like** revenue growth of 1.2% and continuing underlying 
PBT growth of 1.2% to £25.7m. The Group’s balance sheet 
also  remains  strong,  underpinned  by  £125.3m  of 
freehold/long leasehold property. 

Dividend 
The Group’s stated dividend policy since 2015 has been to 
maintain a progressive dividend policy where dividends 
were covered between 4 to 5 times by underlying earnings.  
The Board has recently reviewed its dividend policy and, in 
light of the Group’s strong financial position and confidence 
in its long-term prospects, is pleased to announce a change 
to this policy.  

The Group’s revised dividend policy is that, subject to the 
Group’s trading prospects being satisfactory and taking into 
account potential investments, dividends will be covered by 
between 2.5 to 3.5 times underlying earnings and paid in 
an approximate one-third (interim dividend) and two-thirds 
(final  dividend)  split.  The  Board  believes  the  revised 
dividend policy is appropriate and sustainable, balancing 
the Group’s strong financial position and cash generation 
with its stated strategy of further investment and growth in 
its business.   

The Board is therefore recommending a final dividend for 
2018 of 6.39p per share which, if approved by shareholders 

Professor  
Richard Parry-Jones CBE 
Chairman 

at our AGM on 21 May 2019, will be paid on 24 May 2019 
to shareholders who are on the Company’s register at close 
of business on 26 April 2019.  If approved, this will result in 
a  full  year  dividend  of  8.54p  per  share,  an  increase  of 
33.4% on the prior year (2017: 6.40p) and dividend cover 
of 3.2x (2017: 4.2x). 

AGM 
Our annual general meeting will be held on 21 May 2019 
and I look forward to meeting all shareholders who are able 
to attend. 

Outlook 
The Board notes the latest forecast by the Society of Motor 
Manufacturers and Traders (‘SMMT’) for a further decline 
in the UK new car market in 2019 of 2.3%. The Board is 
also cognisant of the potential impact that Brexit may have 
on both the UK economy generally and the automotive 
sector in particular. At the date of this Annual Report, the 
terms of the UK’s departure from the European Union are 
not certain and the Board therefore remains cautious about 
the economic outlook for 2019.  We are, however, confident 
in our brand partners’ commitment to the UK automotive 
retail  market  (the  second  largest  in  Europe)  and  their 
collective  ability  to  respond  effectively  to  the  potential 
challenges that Brexit may bring. 

Our order book for the important March plate-change period 
is, however, encouraging and our outlook for the full year 
remains unchanged.  

The Group has the benefit of a strong balance sheet with a 
low level of net debt. This, together with an exceptional 
management  team,  leaves  it  well  placed  to  respond  to 
market changes and challenges and to take advantage of 
opportunities when they arise. 

its 

transformation, 

On behalf of the Board, I would once again like to thank 
Peter Johnson who retired as Chairman on 31 December 
2018.  His  leadership  since  the  Group’s  IPO  in  2015 
oversaw 
the 
acquisitions of SG Smith in 2015, Ridgeway in 2016 and 
the disposal of Marshall Leasing in 2017. I would also like 
to thank Mark Raban, who stepped down from his position 
as  Chief  Financial  Officer  on  2  January  2019,  for  his 
valuable contribution to the Group over the same period. 
I am very pleased to welcome Richard Blumberger to the 
Board as our new Chief Financial Officer. 

including 

through 

I would also like to thank the leadership team, our brand 
partners, business suppliers, shareholders and colleagues 
throughout the Group for their continued support during 
another successful year. 

Finally, I would like to thank all of our customers throughout 
the UK who choose Marshall as their preferred source of 
mobility products and services – delighting and satisfying 
you is the ultimate goal of everything we do. 

Professor Richard Parry-Jones CBE 
Chairman 
12 March 2019

* underlying profit before tax is presented excluding non-underlying 

items (see Note 7 to the financial statements)  

** See Note 2 to the financial statements  

8

Marshall Motor Holdings plc | Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Our Vision  
To be the UK's premier automotive retail group as recognised by our colleagues, 
customers, business partners and shareholders. To achieve our vision we will create 
a  people  centric  culture,  as  well  as  operate  as  retailers  who  deliver  retailing 
excellence and are regarded as an employer of  choice.

Class leading  
returns

Customer  
first

Retailing  
excellence

People  
centric

Strategic  
growth

The Group 
aims to deliver 
benchmarked 
class leading 
returns for its 
shareholders.

Customer service 
is at the core of 
the Group as it 
drives repeat car 
sales and the 
purchase of 
higher margin 
aftersales  
products.

The Group 
maintains its 
competitive edge 
by investing in 
the best people 
supported by 
cutting-edge 
technology in  
the sector.

The Group is 
committed to 
recruiting, 
training, and 
retaining the 
best talent in 
the industry.

The Group 
aims to grow 
both organically 
and through 
acquisitions, 
building scale 
with its existing 
brand partners 
and extending 
its geographic 
footprint.

 Underpinned by five strategic pillars

9

 
STRATEGIC REPORT

Operating Review
“Despite a challenging new and used 
car market, the Group performed 
robustly, exceeding last year’s record 
result at continuing underlying PBT 
level” 

“Overall like-for-like revenue growth  
in the face of a decline in the new and 
used vehicle market” 

Daksh Gupta 
Chief Executive 
Officer

Overview 
For the fourth consecutive year since our IPO, I am pleased to 
announce another record result at continuing underlying PBT 
level. Despite the well-publicised decline in our markets, the 
Group delivered continuing underlying PBT of £25.7m, ahead of 
last year’s record result. 

2018 was another successful year for the Group: 

• Total revenue of £2.2 billion with like-for-like revenue growth of 
1.2% to £2.1 billion; 

• Continuing underlying PBT up 1.2% to £25.7m, ahead of last 
year’s record result; 

• Strong used car performance: like-for-like volumes up 2.3% 
combined with a 32bps margin improvement; 

• Aftersales like-for-like revenue continued to grow, up 2.3%; 

• Like-for-like  total  new  vehicle  unit  sales  down  8.2%  due  to 
impact of WLTP and diesel challenges; 

Like-for-Like Revenue

£2,134.6m (up 1.2%) 
(2017: £2,108.9m)

Continuing Underlying PBT

£25.7m (up 1.2%) 
(2017: £25.4m)

Full Year Dividend

8.54p (up 33.4%) 
(2017: 6.40p)

• Disciplined  cost  management  despite  significant  costs 
like-for-like  operating  expenses  as  a 

headwinds  with 
percentage of turnover marginally down at 10.1%; 

Ninth Year of   
‘Great Place to Work’ Status

• Net  debt  at  31  December  2018  of  £5.1m  after  continued 
investment in capital expenditure of £23.8m, including a new 
freehold at Lincoln Jaguar Land Rover and a long leasehold 
development at Cambridge Ford; 

• Extinguished  residual  liability  for  historic  defined  benefit 

pension arrangements; 

• Revised dividend cover policy of 2.5 to 3.5 underlying earnings 
with recommended final dividend of 6.39p per share, giving a 
full year dividend of 8.54p per share, an increase of 33.4% 
versus last year; 

• Ninth year of Great Place to Work status with four consecutive 

years achieving ranked status; and 

• Further technological advancements in the Group’s bespoke 

management information system, ‘Phoenix 2’. 

10

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Celebrating Loyalty

Recognising Achievement

Celebrating Success  
Recognising and thanking colleagues is a fundamental element of our commitment to provide a great environment 
for colleagues to work in. It also supports our desire to continue to be recognised as a Best Large UK Workplace. 

Whether it’s for loyalty, outstanding achievement or delivery of our values, we hold several annual events and award 
ceremonies to celebrate our incredible colleagues. Details and photos of each event are featured in our quarterly 
colleague magazine so we can share our colleagues’ success with everyone and reinforce how important these 
programmes are.

11

MAVTA  Awards

Apprentice Award

  
STRATEGIC REPORT

Our  
strategy

Class  
leading returns

Customer  
first

The Group’s strategic 
vision, which is unchanged, 
is to become the UK’s 
premier automotive Group 
and this remains central to 
everything we do. The five 
strategic pillars, of equal 
importance, which underpin 
that vision are: class 
leading returns; putting 
our customers first; 
delivering retailing 
excellence for the benefit 
of our customers; being 
people-centric by focusing 
on employee engagement; 
and pursuing strategic 
growth both organically 
and through targeted 
acquisitions in-line with the 
Group’s strategy.

The Group’s strategy of building a 
balanced brand portfolio in 
attractive geographic locations, has 
assisted the continuation of our 
strong track record in the face of a 
more challenging market.  In spite 
of an overall market decline during 
the Year, with the new car market 
declining by 6.8% and the used car 
market declining by 2.1%, our like-
for-like revenue grew by 1.2% and 
our continuing underlying PBT grew 
by 1.2% versus last year’s record 
result.  In the face of increasing 
pressures, our costs were tightly 
controlled and our margins 
continued to be strong.   

In light of the Group’s strong 
financial position and confidence in 
its long-term prospects, we are 
pleased that we have been able to 
amend our dividend policy which 
has resulted in a 33.4% increase in 
our full year dividend. 

Continuing to grow with our brand 
partners will enable the Group to 
access further benefits of scale 
across a number of areas of the 
business, including improved 
commercial terms with suppliers 
and vehicle stock management.  
The recent ŠKODA acquisitions 
also highlight the strength of our 
relationships with our brand 
partners.  We continue to actively 
pursue acquisition opportunities 
which are in-line with our strategy 
and meet our investment criteria. 

Customer satisfaction is an important 
element of the Group’s strategy, 
driving repeat business and loyalty to 
the Marshall brand.  

It is therefore pleasing that during the 
Year, 45.6% of the 40,471 customers 
surveyed who visited our showrooms 
indicated that they were either 
previous customers or were 
recommended to us, up from 42% in 
the prior year. 

Our in-house developed 
management information system 
(Phoenix 2) provides daily customer 
satisfaction information by dealership 
which allows management to 
proactively respond to customer 
needs and follow up on potential 
areas of concern. 

In addition, on a weekly basis, the 
Group centrally monitors customer 
satisfaction for both sales and 
aftersales across all locations and 
brand partners.  This alignment 
ensures we focus on our brand 
partners’ key measures whilst also 
ensuring consistency of internal 
performance monitoring. 

The Group’s continued expansion 
and scale gives customers a wider 
choice of location and products, 
increasing both customer satisfaction 
and sales. 

12

 
 
 
 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

www.marshall.co.uk is  
the sixth most visited dealer  
group website in the UK

13

Business Intelligence Platform

STRATEGIC REPORT

Retailing 
excellence

People 
centric

A key differentiator is the Group’s 
focus on, and investment in, 
technology aimed at expanding the 
Group’s customer base and 
improving operating efficiencies. 
2018 saw further investment in 
these areas. 

The Group is focused on 
engaging and attracting new and 
existing customers with its online 
presence both through our 
website and social media. During 
the Year, the Group has focused 
on maximising its marketing return 
on investment through its online 
channels which has seen an 
increase in lead conversion. The 
Group is widely regarded as being 
at the forefront of social media in 
the sector, winning 14 awards in 
the last two years and two further 
awards so far in 2019. 

During the Year, the Group 
partnered with one of the UK’s 
leading suppliers of used car 
pricing and transaction data. This 
data has been uniquely integrated 
into Phoenix 2, our bespoke, in-
house management information 
system, to create a separate 
module to support management in 
vehicle valuations. This enables 
visibility of pricing comparison to 
the market, including regional and 
market desirability variations, all of 
which leads to greater customer 
transparency and optimal pricing. 
In addition, central oversight of 
stock management and market 
pricing has been improved. We 
believe this gives us a competitive 
advantage in the market place. 

For the ninth consecutive year, the 
Group has been recognised by the 
Great Place to Work Institute as a 
‘great place to work’ based on 
colleagues surveyed during 2018. Our 
2018 scores were excellent with 78% 
of colleagues stating that Marshall was 
a ‘great place to work’. This compares 
to an average UK score of 55%. 

Based on the results of the 2017 
survey, the Group was ranked 21st of 
the Top 30 large employers in the UK 
which included employers such as 
Cisco, Admiral Group Plc, SAP and 
MBNA. 2018 was the fourth year 
running that the Group was ranked. 
Given the further improvements of 
colleague engagement in 2018, we 
are confident of being ranked for a fifth 
year running which only 11 companies 
in the Great Place to Work Institute 
have achieved. 

The Group is committed to diversity in 
both Marshall and the wider industry. 
This is demonstrated by the Group 
recently becoming a member of the 
Automotive 30 Club, the aim of which 
is to work towards having women in 
30% of key leadership positions by 
2030. Currently, 14.3% of the Group’s 
management positions are undertaken 
by female colleagues and we continue 
to work towards growing this 
proportion.  

Our Gender Pay Gap Report, which is 
published on our website, sets out the 
actions we are taking to address the 
gender pay gap which exists both in 
our business and the wider sector. We 
have made improvements in this area 
and are committed to do more.  

As previously reported, the Group 
continues to make a significant 
investment in its sales executive 
offering with the objective of increasing 
diversity and retention in these key 
customer interfacing roles. Since 
launch, the Group has seen a 
significant decrease in sales executive 
turnover although there remains more 
to do in this area. In addition, the 
proportion of female sales executives 
in the Group has grown by 60%. This 
is encouraging for succession, talent 
development and gender diversity for 
the future.  

14

Recognising that people are at the 
heart of our success, further strategic 
initiatives have been launched during 
the Year in the following areas: 

• Future leaders programme to identify 
and develop our future management 
teams – this programme is for high 
potential colleagues to ready 
themselves for their first line 
management position. Encouragingly, 
we have already seen a number of the 
first cohort achieve promotion to their 
first line management role.   
• Management development 

programme aimed at supporting and 
upskilling existing managers to help 
better equip them to get the best out 
of their teams and improve business 
performance.  

• New in-house recruitment team giving 
more control over recruitment quality 
and cost. This initiative also sees the 
implementation of a new applicant 
tracking system which will provide 
greater control over our employment 
brand and candidate experience, 
whilst also saving time and cost.  
• New learning management system 
Our new Group wide e-learning 
platform will help us to deliver more 
learning and development 
opportunities to all colleagues.    

In keeping with our social agenda and 
aim to support local communities, we 
have also implemented a new work 
experience programme to attract new 
talent for the future alongside our 
current apprentice programme which 
currently has 122 participants. 

Strategic 
growth

The Group’s strategy is to grow scale 
with existing brand partners in new 
geographical territories, as 
demonstrated by the acquisitions 
completed since our IPO. 
There has been considerable 
consolidation in the UK motor retail 
market over the last ten years, in 
which the Group has played an active 
role. We expect further industry 
consolidation over the coming years 
for which the Group is very well 
positioned, with a strong balance 
sheet and excellent manufacturer 
relationships. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Industry leading on  
social media

The Group is committed to diversity

UK’s largest ŠKODA retailer

15

STRATEGIC REPORT

Development at Lincoln Jaguar Land Rover

1
p
e
t
S

Site search & acquisition 
In March 2016, we started searching for alternate premises to 
accommodate  our  Land  Rover  and  Jaguar  businesses  in 
Lincoln.  Various options were considered and in November 
2016, JLR approved our proposed relocation to a greenfield site 
identified at Teal Park. Heads of terms for the land purchase 
were negotiated and agreed in December 2016 and solicitors 
instructed to prepare the contracts. Further negotiations were 
conducted to ensure delivery of services to the site during the 
first  half  of  2017  and  contracts  were  exchanged  for  the 
conditional purchase of the site in July 2017.

Planning application and detailed design 
The design process began in June 2016 when the site was 
first identified.  The design development proceeded through 
various  iterations  culminating  in  brand  approval  to  our 
preferred designs in February 2017 and a detailed planning 
application  submitted  in  July  with  full  planning  consent 
received in October 2017.  Detailed design process then 
commenced in readiness for tender.

2
p
e
t
S

Procurement and build phase 
A full design team was appointed and each component price for the building contract was negotiated with BDB Design & Build.  This process 
commenced in July 2017 whilst waiting for planning consent and letter of intent was placed in December 2017 followed by a start on site in 
February 2018.  Construction programme was overseen for the 52 week build phase and all fit out items were costed and ordered during this 
period culminating in formal handover was accepted on 1st February 2019, approximately 3 weeks ahead of schedule. 

3
p
e
t
S

Overall therefore, it was almost 3 years from deciding to start looking for relocation options through to receiving the keys. 

Cambridge FordStore Dealership

16

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Acquisitions and disposals 
The Group continually seeks to maximise return on capital 
employed and closely monitors and reviews its portfolio to 
ensure optimal returns. As a result, in November 2017 the 
Group closed six sub-scale, loss-making businesses. These 
businesses  lost,  in  aggregate,  £1.3m  in  2017,  with  the 
resultant  financial  benefits  of  their  closure  being  realised 
during the Year. The Group also successfully disposed of its 
property interests and liabilities in each of these closed sites 
by the end of the Year. Management took further proactive 
steps during the Year, closing two used car centres and one 
franchised site, Vauxhall Leicester, as part of a wider network 
reorganisation announced by the brand in 2018. 

Consistent  with  our  strategic  growth  pillar,  during  early 
2019 the Group announced two acquisitions which have 
further  extended  our  relationship  with  ŠKODA  and  the 
Volkswagen  Group  as  a  whole,  growing  our  ŠKODA 
partnership from 5 locations to 11.  

Our growth with ŠKODA is in-line with the Group’s strategy 
to  grow  scale  with  key  brand  partners  and  extend  our 
geographic footprint. The Group joined the ŠKODA network 
in 2013 with the acquisition of Silver Street Automotive which 
included Barnstaple ŠKODA. We added Croydon ŠKODA as 
part of the acquisition of S.G. Smith in 2015, followed by the 
addition  of  our  Newbury,  Oxford  and  Reading  ŠKODA 
businesses as a part of the acquisition of Ridgeway in 2016.  

In  January  2019,  the  Group  acquired  Leicester  and 
Nottingham ŠKODA from Sandicliffe Limited and in February 
2019  acquired  the  Bedford,  Harlow,  Letchworth  and 
Northampton  ŠKODA  businesses  from  Progress  Bedford 
Limited. These dealerships are in excellent locations, fully 
compliant with the latest ŠKODA brand standards and are 
contiguous to our existing ŠKODA sites. We believe they 
have potential for growth and improvement in their operating 
performance as part of a scaled and focused division. 

Each acquisition was completed in consultation with, and the 
support of, ŠKODA UK, making Marshall the largest ŠKODA 
retailer in the UK. The ŠKODA brand has enjoyed strong 
growth in recent years. In 2018 the brand achieved 74,512 
registrations which represented a UK market share of 3.2% 
and has enjoyed a 13.1% growth in the last five years. This 
has  been  driven  by  significant  product  development, 
particularly across the SUV segment, and this is expected to 
increase further with the introduction of two new models in 
2019. The brand is part of the Volkswagen Group which has 
announced it will invest almost €44 billion in electrification 
and new mobility services. We are very proud to represent 
the  ŠKODA  brand  and  wish  to  thank  the  ŠKODA  UK 
management team for their support over the years and look 
forward to building on our excellent relationship. We would 
also like to take this opportunity to welcome all colleagues of 
the acquired businesses to the Group. 

Following  these  additions,  the  Group  now  consists  of 
106  franchises  representing  23  brand  partners  trading  in 
27 counties nationwide. In addition, the Group operates five 
trade  parts  specialists,  three  used  car  centres,  five 
standalone body shops and a pre-delivery inspection (PDI) 
centre. The Group operates a balanced portfolio of volume, 
premium and alternate premium brands including all of the 
top five premium brands. 

The  Group’s  diverse  portfolio  means 
it  represents 
manufacturer brands accounting for 81.4% of all new vehicle 
sales  in  the  UK.  This  scale  and  diversified  spread  of 
representation helps mitigate the effect of the cyclical nature 
of individual brand performance. 

Investment in new retail locations and  
major developments 
The  Group  continues  to  invest  in  its  retail  sites  and  has 
invested a total of £19.6m into its property portfolio during the 
Year. Investment in relocations and major rebuilds included: 

• Lincoln  Jaguar  Land  Rover  this  development  brings 
together Lincoln Jaguar and Lincoln Land Rover, previously 
two separate leasehold sites, on one purpose-built freehold 
site  providing  a  significant  increase  in  capacity  for  both 
vehicle and aftermarket sales. 

• Cambridge  Ford  this  relocated  our  existing  leasehold 
showroom on Newmarket Road to a state-of-the-art Ford 
Store  on  long  leasehold  property  and  provides  a 
significantly improved customer experience. 

• Completion of a redevelopment of Bedford Land Rover, 
an existing freehold site. This investment brings the site up 
to Jaguar Land Rover ‘arch’ concept standard. 

Investment in existing businesses 
In  addition  to  large  scale  redevelopments,  the  Group 
continues  to  invest  in  upgrading  existing  businesses  to 
enhance the customer experience, satisfy brand requirements 
and increase sales and aftersales capacities. In recent years, 
the Group has invested significantly in its portfolio, with 84% 
of the Group’s facilities having benefited from investment in 
the latest corporate identity or relocation. We expect this to 
materially reduce after 2019. Significant corporate identity 
upgrades were completed at the following locations: 

• Audi – Sydenham and Taunton 

• Volkswagen Commercial Vehicles – Bridgwater and 

Reading 

• ŠKODA – Newbury and Reading 

• SEAT – Cambridge, Leicester and Newbury 

• Mercedes-Benz Commercial Vehicles – Croydon 

• Honda – Harrogate, Hull, Leicester and Peterborough 

• BMW – Salisbury and Scunthorpe 

• Volvo – Grantham and Leeds

17

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT

Market and Business Update

New Vehicles

                                                                 Variance 
                             2018        2017        Total       LFL 
                          28,871     31,801      (9.2%)    (8.4%) 
                          17,342     21,507    (19.4%)    (7.7%) 

                          46,213     53,308    (13.3%)    (8.2%)

Retail units 
Fleet units 
Total units

As has been widely reported, 2018 was challenging for the 
new  vehicle  market.  The  SMMT  recorded  new  vehicle 
registrations of 2.37m in the Year, a decline of 6.8% versus 
2017 (2.54m).  A number of factors impacted the market: 

• Firstly,  general  economic  uncertainty,  including  the 
negative  impact  of  Brexit  on  consumer  confidence. 
Weakness in Sterling also impacted new vehicle prices 
and European manufacturers’ focus on the UK market.   

• Secondly, the introduction of the Worldwide Light Vehicle 
Test Procedure (WLTP) which replaced the outgoing New 
European  Driving  Cycle  (NEDC)  in  September  2018, 
significantly impacted the new vehicle market in 2018.  
The introduction of the new procedure, during a peak 
registration month, led to shortages of supply and longer 
lead times in certain brands and continued to impact the 
industry for the remainder of 2018 and into 2019. 

• Thirdly,  the  current  uncertainty  of  future  government 
policy in relation to diesel engines has led to a decline of 
29.6% in total diesel registrations, taking its share to a 
15  year  low  of  31.7%.  This  particularly  impacted  the 
premium segment which has historically offered a higher 

Used Vehicles

                                                                   Growth 
                             2018        2017        Total        LFL 
                          43,302     44,237      (2.1%)      2.3% 

Total Units

The SMMT reported further used vehicle market decline 
of 2.1% in 2018 despite the used car market benefiting 
from WLTP-related supply shortages in the new vehicle 
market.  In the context of an overall market decline, we 
are  therefore  particularly  pleased  to  report  continued 
like-for-like growth in used vehicle unit sales.  In addition 
to increased unit sales, we also delivered a total gross 
margin improvement of 36bps which we consider to be 
an excellent performance. 

The  Group’s  strategy  on  used  car  sales  is  to  utilise 
existing  capacity  within  the  current  Group  portfolio  to 
maximise throughput on its existing footprint, therefore 
mitigating the associated investment in additional sites 
and resource. We believe this approach highlights the 
resilience of the franchise model even during a time of 
declining new vehicle sales. 

As a result of the closures made in November 2017, total 
used car unit sales declined by 2.1%. Like-for-like used unit 
sales grew 2.3% and like-for-like used vehicle revenues 
increased by 8.1%. This is a particularly strong performance 
when compared with the overall market decline. 

proportion of diesel vehicles. Manufacturers have been 
responding  to  changing  consumer  demand  for  petrol 
engines by switching production through 2018 and we 
expect to see this continue through 2019. 

Against this market backdrop, during the Year, the Group’s 
like-for-like new retail unit sales declined by 8.4% against 
an  overall  UK  new  retail  registration  decline  of  6.4%.   
Like-for-like new revenues declined by 4.5%.  Given the 
Group’s weighting towards premium brands which were 
more  affected  by  the  decline  in  diesel,  together  with  a 
number of our key brands being more exposed to WLTP 
supply shortages, we were pleased with this result. 

Total unit sales to fleet customers declined by 19.4%. This 
was  largely  driven  by  a  commercial  decision  we  took 
during  2017  to  withdraw  from  certain  low  margin  fleet 
business. Excluding the impact of this and site closures, 
like-for-like unit sales to fleet customers declined by 7.7% 
versus an overall market decline of 7.2%.  

Sales of new vehicles utilising personal contract purchase 
(“PCP”)  have  stabilised  at  81%  during  the Year  (2017: 
83%).  At 31 December 2018, the Group had 69,429 active 
PCPs which create a defined point of renewal/purchase/ 
replacement and we actively manage the renewal process 
to ensure, where possible, customers are retained with the 
Group. 

Total new vehicle gross margins were flat versus 2017 at 
7.2%, a pleasing performance in a challenging market. 

The  continued  improvement  in  used  volumes  and 
margins has been driven by the addition of our recently 
enhanced  in-house  management  information  system, 
Phoenix  2  as  described  earlier.  This,  along  with  a 
continuation  of  our  56  day  stocking  policy  which 
encourages  accelerated  stock  turn,  leading  to  higher 
sales  volumes  and  reduced  residual  value  risk, 
contributed to the strong volume and margin performance 
during the Year.  

There was further growth in the number of used vehicles 
purchased using PCP products which have now become 
a key feature of the 3-6 year old used car market in which 
the Group primarily operates. 63% of the Group’s used 
vehicles  which  were  purchased  on  finance  were 
purchased using a PCP (2017: 58%). As in the new car 
of 
market,  PCPs 
renewal/purchase/replacement and we actively manage 
the  renewal  process 
to  ensure,  where  possible, 
customers are retained by the Group.  

defined 

create 

point 

a 

We  believe  the  recent  popularity  of  used  car  PCPs 
presents the Group with future opportunities for the sale 
of  older  used  cars  given  the  event-driven  nature  of  a 
PCP. 

18

 
 
 
                                       
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

MINI Clubman City

Peugeot 508

Vauxhall GT X Experimental brand concept

19

BMW X7

Ford Transit Connect

STRATEGIC REPORT

Aftersales

                                                                Growth 
                             2018        2017        Total     LFL 
                            246.1       243.1        1.3%   2.3% 

Revenue (£m)

Aftersales remains a key strategic focus of the Group, 
providing  revenue  and  profit  assurance  during  a 
challenging  economic  environment.    Our  strong 
performance in recent years continued during the Year, 
with  total  revenue  growth  of  1.3%  (2.3%  like-for-like). 
This growth has partially offset margin pressure (down 
126bps  versus  2017)  as  a  result  of  reduced 
pre-delivery  inspection  revenue  caused  by  fewer  new 
vehicle  sales  and  an  increased  proportion  of  lower 
margin parts sales. 

the  Group  operates 

In  addition  to  our  retail  centre  based  aftersales 
facilities, 
five  standalone 
bodyshops,  five  trade  parts  centres  and  one  PDI 
centre. Aftersales contributes 44.0% of total retail gross 
profit  and  therefore  makes  a  significant  financial 
contribution  to  the  Group  which  is  important  in  the 
context of a more cyclical new car market. 

In  order  to  drive  customer  retention,  we  offer  service 
plans  to  customers  of  both  new  and  used  vehicles 
which allow customers  to  plan and  budget for service 
costs.  These  plans  are  often  included  in  the  monthly 
payment of a vehicle and are therefore very convenient 
for customers.  At 31 December 2018, the Group had 
over 75,000 live service plans (2017: 77,000). 

Market Outlook 
In 2018 the SMMT reported new vehicle registrations of 
2.37m, down 6.8% versus 2017 and down 13.1% from 
the peak year of 2016. The current SMMT forecast for 
2019 predicts a further new car market decline of 2.3% 
to  2.31m.  Further  declines  are  expected  in  diesel 
market share, with growth in registrations of alternative 
fuel vehicle registrations expected to continue. 

The new vehicle market in 2019 may also be affected 
by  the  implementation  of  WLTP  for  commercial 
vehicles  and  changes  to  the  Real  Driving  Emissions 
Test in September. 

Finally,  we  are  cognisant  of  the  potential  impact  that 
Brexit  may  have  on  both  the  wider  UK  economy  and 
the  automotive  sector.  At  the  date  of  this  report,  the 
terms of the UK’s departure from the European Union 
are  not  certain.  However,  we  remain  confident  in  our 
brand partners’ commitment to the UK automotive retail 
market  (the  second  largest  in  Europe)  and  their 
collective  ability  to  respond  effectively  to  the  potential 
challenges that this situation may bring. 

Summary

In a challenging economic environment and reduced new 
and  used  vehicle  market,  the  Group  has  delivered  a 
record continuing underlying PBT performance. 

I  am  particularly  pleased  with  our  used  vehicle 
in  aftersales 
performance  and  continued  growth 
revenues.  These revenue streams provide resilience to 
the  business  during  more  challenging  periods  of  the 
cyclical new car market, as demonstrated during the Year. 

The Group has the benefit of a strong balance sheet with 
a  low  level  of  net  debt  which  leaves  it  well  placed  to 
respond  to  market  changes  and  take  advantage  of 
opportunities when they arise. 

I am pleased that Richard Parry-Jones, as Chairman, and 
Richard  Blumberger,  as  Chief  Financial  Officer,  have 
joined the Group and Board. I would also like to thank 
Peter  Johnson  and  Mark  Raban  for  their  significant 
contributions to the Group since its IPO. 

Finally, on behalf of the Board I would like to thank our 
colleagues, and our brand and business partners for their 
hard work and support during what is now my 10th full 
year with the Group. I look forward to continuing to work 
together in 2019. 

Daksh Gupta 
Chief Executive Officer 
12 March 2019

20

 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       
 
 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Honda E Prototype

Maserati Ghibli Ribelle

The new Mercedes-Benz EQC

SEAT Arona

BMW S 1000 RR

KIA Proceed

21

STRATEGIC REPORT

Financial Review

“A resilient and cash  
generative business”

Overview
I  am  delighted  to  present  the  Group’s  2018  annual 
results, my first since appointment as Chief Financial 
Officer in January 2019. 

The Group is focused on delivering long-term value for 
our shareholders, our customers and our people. This 
year’s financial results show continued underlying PBT 
growth, strong margin, growth in earnings per share 
(“EPS”) and solid cash generation. The Group is in a 
strong  financial  position  with  low  leverage,  a  strong 
balance  sheet  and  long-term  committed  financing 
facilities.  As a result of this, and our confidence in the 
Group’s  long-term  prospects,  we  have  been  able  to 
amend our dividend policy and increase our dividend. 

This was another good year for the Group which again 
demonstrated the strategic importance and resilience 
of our business in a toughening market. 

Following four years of strong growth since IPO, we 
anticipated a challenging market in 2018.  As such, our 
focus for the Year was on our cost base and portfolio 
management.  In-line  with  this  strategy,  we  closed  a 

Reported Financial Performance 
                                              2018       2017     Var % 
Revenue                            2,186.9   2,232.0    (2.0%) 
Gross profit                           255.7      258.3    (1.0%) 
Operating Expenses           (223.6)   (225.4)       0.8% 

Operating Profit                    32.0        32.9    (2.6%) 

Net finance costs                   (6.4)       (7.5)     15.4% 

PBT underlying                     25.7        25.4       1.2% 

Non-underlying items             (7.0)     (12.8)     45.6% 

PBT reported                         18.7        12.6     48.9% 

Tax                                          (4.8)       (3.1)  (54.0%) 

PAT reported                         13.9          9.5     47.2% 

Discontinued operations           0.6        39.8  (98.5%) 

Profit for the year                  14.5        49.3  (70.5%) 

Due  to  2017  site  closures,  reported  revenue  from 
continuing  operations  was  £2,186.9m  compared  with 
£2,232.0m for 2017. The Group’s operating profit, on a 
continuing  basis,  before  non-underlying  items,  was 
£32.0m  compared  to  £32.9m  in  2017.  Continuing 
underlying PBT in the Year was £25.7m compared to 
£25.4m in 2017.  

Richard Blumberger 
Chief Financial 
Officer 

number of sub-scale, loss-making sites in both 2017 
and 2018.  

We are, nevertheless, committed to targeting further 
growth and in early 2019 we have further expanded our 
portfolio in-line with our strategy to grow with existing 
brand  partners  and  extend  our  geographic  footprint, 
and we recently announced two acquisitions, adding 6 
ŠKODA dealerships.  

Our  balance  sheet  remains  robust,  with  minimal  net 
debt and we continue to invest in our asset base, with 
a  particular  focus  on  freehold  and  long  leasehold 
property. Total capital expense of £23.8m was invested 
during 
to 
investments in freehold and long leasehold properties. 

including  £19.6m 

the  Year, 

relating 

Notwithstanding that the year ahead may be uncertain 
and we expect the difficult market backdrop to continue, 
the Group is in a strong position to continue its strategic 
growth and market penetration.

Our  reported  PBT  of  £18.7m  (2017:  £12.6m)  included 
one-off non-underlying items of £7.0m (2017: £12.8m) as 
set out on page 23 of this report. 

Analysis of  Reported Revenue and Gross Profit 
The segmental mix on a reported basis is shown in the 
table below. Whilst the like-for-like analysis is covered later 
in the report, the reported basis demonstrates the decline 
in the new car market in 2018 and our strong performance 
in the used car market despite the overall market decline. 

Twelve months ended 31 December 2018

                                   Revenue                 Gross Profit 
                                £m          mix*             £m         mix 
New Car          1,064.8        47.7%           76.3     29.9% 
Used Car            920.2        41.2%           66.8     26.1% 
Aftersales           246.1        11.0%         112.3     44.0% 
Internal/Other    (44.3)                –             0.3              – 

Total                 2,186.9      100.0%         255.7   100.0%

22

 
 
 
   
 
                                                         
 
 
 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

In addition, the Group recognised a further profit on the 
disposal of our discontinued leasing segment of £0.6m 
which related to the settlement of certain historic pension 
liabilities at a reduced cost to that originally provided. 

Like-for-Like Financial Performance  

Basis of  Comparatives 
To  enable  effective  comparison  of  our  year-on-year 
performance, underlying operating profit is shown on a 
like-for-like  basis.  The  full  definition  of  an  Alternative 
Performance  Measure  can  be  found  in  Note  2  to  the 
financial statements.

Like-for-like                     2018       2017      Var% 
Revenue                              2,134.6   2,108.9       1.2% 
Gross Profit                            250.5      251.1    (0.3%) 

GP%                                                      11.7%         11.9%      (17 bps) 
Expenses                             (216.4)   (216.6)       0.1% 

Operating Profit                      34.1        34.6    (1.4%)

Like-for-Like Segmental Analysis

Twelve months ended 31 December 2018

                                   Revenue                 Gross Profit 
                                £m          mix*             £m         mix 
New Car          1,045.4        48.0%           75.0     30.0% 
Used Car            893.1        41.0%           65.4     26.1% 
Aftersales           240.5        11.0%         109.8     43.9% 
Internal/Other    (44.3)                –             0.3              – 

Total                 2,134.6      100.0%         250.5   100.0%

Twelve months ended 31 December 2017

                                   Revenue                 Gross Profit 
                                £m          mix*             £m         mix 
New Car          1,094.8        50.8%           82.3     32.8% 
Used Car            826.5        38.3%           57.9     23.1% 
Aftersales           234.9        10.9%         110.7     44.1% 
Internal/Other    (47.3)                –             0.3              – 

Total                 2,108.9      100.0%         251.1   100.0%  

Twelve months ended 31 December 2017

                                   Revenue                 Gross Profit 
                                £m          mix*             £m         mix 
New Car          1,166.5        51.2%           84.1     32.6% 
Used Car            869.7        38.2%           59.9     23.2% 
Aftersales           243.1        10.6%         114.0     44.2% 
Internal/Other    (47.3)                –             0.3              – 

Total                 2,232.0      100.0%         258.3   100.0%  

* mix calculation excludes Internal / Other Sales

Finance Costs 
Net finance costs decreased in the Year to £6.4m (2017: 
£7.5m), reflecting the ongoing strengthening of the balance 
sheet and focus on vehicle stock management. 

Generating Sustainable Shareholder Value
Underlying profit before tax was £25.7m (2017: £25.4m). 
The total reported effective tax rate was 24.8%, (17.1% 
on a continuing underlying basis). Profit from continuing 
operations after tax was £21.3m (2017: £20.8m), giving 
a  basic  continuing  earnings  per  share  of  27.4p,  an 
increase of 2% on the prior year.

Non-Underlying Items
Non-underlying  items  are  presented  separately  in  the 
income statement to provide an effective comparison of 
performance.  Non-underlying  items  in  the  Year  are 
summarised below: 

                                                           2018        2017 
2017 closure provision                       3,282     (6,783) 
Impairment of goodwill                     (9,302)              – 
2018 closure provisions/ 
other restructuring costs                     (943)              – 
Pension                                                     –     (6,000) 

Total                                                (6,963)   (12,783) 

Profit on disposal of discontinued 
business                                                589      36,851 

We are pleased to report that all outstanding property 
issues in relation to dealership closures announced in 
November 2017 were resolved during 2018, ahead of our 
initial  timing  and  cost  expectations,  leading  to  a  net 
non-underlying profit of £3.3m in the Year. 

Following our annual impairment test, a charge of £9.3m 
has  been  taken  against  our  BMW/MINI  and  Nissan 
goodwill values, which is detailed in the balance sheet 
review section of this report. 

Other restructuring costs of £0.9m are detailed in note 7 
to the financial statements. 

23

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                         
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                         
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                         
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT

Life-for-like Revenue

Life-for-like Operating Expenses

£2,134.6m (up 1.2%) 
(2017: £2,108.9m)

£216.4m (down 0.1%) 
(2017: £216.6m)

  (2017: 
  was 
Like-for-like  revenue 
£2,108.9m), a 1.2% growth in a year which saw the new 
car market declining by 6.8% and the used car market 
declining by 2.1%. 

  £2,134.6m 

Like-for-like new retail units, one of our Key Performance 
Indicators (KPI), declined 8.4% in a year in which the new 
retail  market  declined  6.4%.  Like-for-like  fleet  units 
declined by 7.7% against a market decline of 7.2%. As 
expected,  these  were  impacted  by  WLTP  and  issues 
surrounding  diesel-fuelled  engines  which  had  a 
disproportionate effect on our portfolio. As a result of an 
increase in the average revenue per unit, like-for-like new 
revenue only declined by 4.5%. 

Our  used  car  business  performed  very  well  with 
like-for-like unit sales up 2.3% year on year against a 
used car market decline of 2.1%. Used unit sales is a KPI 
and continued to be a key area of focus. Strong focus on 
margin and mix meant the 2.3% unit increase translated 
into an 8.1% revenue increase. 

Aftersales  revenue  had  another  strong  year  with 
like-for-like  revenues  up  2.3%,  the  fourth  consecutive 
year of growth.

Life-for-like Gross Profit

£250.5m (down 0.3%) 
(2017: £251.1m)

Like-for-like gross profit at £250.5m (2017: £251.1m) was 
consistent year on year, with margins remaining strong 
at 11.7% compared to 11.9% in 2017. 

New vehicle margins were slightly down in the year at 
7.2% (2017: 7.5%) which we consider a good result in a 
challenging market. 

Our used vehicle margin at 7.3% was up by 32bps driven 
by our technology-led approach in our used car sales 
process and further reflects our strategic focus on the 
used  car  market.  The  combination  of  revenue  and 
volume growth led to a total gross profit improvement of 
£7.5m on used vehicles. 

Like-for-like aftersales margin was 45.7% compared to 
47.1%  last  year.  This  was  as  a  result  of  reduced 
pre-delivery  inspection  revenue  caused  by  fewer  new 
vehicle  sales  and  an  increased  proportion  of  lower 
margin parts sales.

Despite cost pressures continuing to impact the overall 
sector,  like-for-like  expenses  were  marginally  down 
£216.4m (2017: £216.6m). This was strong performance 
given the significant cost headwinds experienced. The 
Group placed particular focus on discretionary costs both 
in our central cost base as well as at dealership level, 
including marketing effectiveness, demonstrator vehicle 
costs and stocking costs.

Life-for-like Operating Profit

£34.1m (down 1.4%) 
(2017: £34.6m)

Given the factors referred to above, like-for-like operating 
profit at £34.1m (2017: £34.6m), whilst slightly down on 
2017, is a good example of the resilience shown in a 
difficult  market,  allowing  our  operating  margins  to  be 
consistent at 1.6% year on year.

24

 
 
 
 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Shareholder Returns 

Full year dividend per share 

8.54p (up 33.4%) 
(2017: 6.40p)

The Group has a strong track record of delivering growth 
in  our  financial  results  and  growing  returns  to  our 
shareholders  as  a  result  is  an  important  part  of  our 
strategy.  As  mentioned  earlier,  we  have  amended  our 
dividend  policy  and  as  such, 
final  dividend 
recommended by the Board is 6.39p per share, giving a 
full year dividend of 8.54p and cover of 3.2x underlying 
earnings per share (2017: 4.2x). This year’s dividend to 
shareholders and change in dividend policy, demonstrates 
the Group’s strong financial position and our confidence in 
its long-term prospects and represents growth of 33.4%. 

the 

During the Year, total dividends of £5.0m were paid to 
shareholders. 
ROCE 
Return on capital employed (ROCE) for the Year was 
12.8% (2017: 13.3%). ROCE is calculated as underlying 
profit before tax divided by total equity. 

The Group has ongoing capital expenditure requirements 
and  will  continue  to  pursue  organic  and  acquisitive 
growth  opportunities.  This  may  also  include  further 
freehold investments in preference to leasehold liabilities 
which can have a short-term impact on ROCE as it did in 
2018 with our capital programme. 
Balance Sheet 
There is no material difference between the reported 
and the like-for-like balance sheet so unless otherwise 
stated, the remainder of the financial review is on an 
as reported basis.

£m                                                   2018             2017 
Intangible                                        112.2            121.6 
Freehold/long leasehold                 125.3            116.3 
Other retail assets                            30.5              26.1 
Other                                                   2.6                2.6 

Fixed assets                                  270.5            266.7 

Inventory                                         384.0            401.3 
Trade / other receivables                  79.7              92.1 
Cash & equivalents                             1.2                4.9 
Assets held for sale                            0.8                0.8 

Current assets                              465.7            499.0 

Vehicle funding                              (370.8)          (380.6) 
Trade / other payables                   (128.6)          (151.3) 
Bank / other debt                               (6.3)              (7.1) 
Other liabilities                                 (30.1)            (35.5) 

Total liabilities                              (535.8)          (574.5) 

Net assets                                      200.4            191.2 

Reported net debt (£m)                     (5.1)              (2.2) 

25

Intangibles 
Each year we test the carrying value of goodwill and other 
intangible  assets  for  impairment.  For  the  year  ended 
31 December 2018, we have applied a more cautious 
assessment  on  the  market  outlook  for  our  BMW  and 
Nissan CGUs and as a result, recognised an impairment 
of £9.3m of goodwill. Further details are set out in Note 
15 to the financial statements. 

There were no additions to goodwill and intangibles in the 
Year with the only movement being the amortisation of 
previous acquisitions. 

Freehold / Long Leasehold 
The Group’s property portfolio is a key strength of the 
business.  Our  capital  programme  continues,  with  a 
further £23.8m of capital expenditure invested in the Year 
including the new builds of Lincoln Jaguar Land Rover 
and Cambridge Ford Store, the major redevelopment of 
Bedford  Land  Rover  and  further  investment  across  a 
number  of  our  brands.  This  brings  our  cumulative 
expenditure to £76.4m over the last three years, of which 
£63.1m has been invested in freehold and long leasehold 
properties. The net book value of the Group’s property, 
plant  and  equipment  at  31  December  2018  was 
£155.8m, of which £125.3m (80.4%) related to freehold 
and long leasehold property. 

Strong Working Capital Management 
Working capital management is a key focus for the Group 
with a strong result in inventory and debtor management 
in the Year. 

Inventory, net of provisions, at £384.0m reduced year on 
year by 4.3% with a strong focus on stock profiling. As at 
31  December  2018,  the  value  of  vehicles  held  under 
vehicle  financing  arrangements  was  £370.8m  (2017: 
£380.6m). 

A reduction of 13.5% in our trade and other receivables 
was  reflective  of  the  strong  focus  placed  on  working 
capital management at all levels of the business.  

Overall  the  Group  had  reported  net  assets  as  at 
31 December 2018 of £200.4m (2017: £191.8m), which 
equates to £2.57 per share (2017: £2.47). 

Good Cash Conversion 
Operating cash flow conversion (defined as cash flow 
generated by operations divided by continuing operations 
operating  profit  before  interest,  tax,  depreciation  and 
amortisation),  is  key  to  allowing  us  to  maintain  our 
investment programme.  During the Year, cash inflows 
(2017:  £69.6m), 
from  operations  were  £36.5m 
representing  a  cash  conversion  of  88.2%  (2017: 
150.0%).  Our  cash  conversion  has  been  consistently 
strong, 
focus  on  working  capital 
reflecting  our 
management over recent years.  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT

Net Debt and Facilities 
As  at  31  December  2018,  net  debt  was  £5.1m  (2017: 
£2.2m). Our current facilities include a £120m revolving 
credit facility which is in place until June 2021. Our interest 
rate  is  LIBOR  plus  1.2%  to  2.0%,  dependant  on  the 
leverage level. We remain comfortably within each of our 
banking covenants. 

Tax 
The Group manages all taxes, both direct and indirect to 
ensure that it pays the appropriate amount of tax. Our tax 
strategy is reviewed regularly and approved by the Board. 

for 

the  Year 

tax  charge 

The  Group’s 
(before 
non-underlying items) was £4.4m (2017: £5.3m) giving an 
effective tax rate of 17.1% (2017: 18.1%). The effective 
tax rate was positively impacted by a review of historic 
capital allowance claims. Excluding the impact of these, 
the underlying effective tax rate would have been 21.6%. 
After  adjusting    for  non-underlying  items,  the  total  tax 
charge was £4.8m (2017: £3.8m) giving an effective tax 
rate of 24.8% (2017: 7.1%). 

Full details of the Group’s tax governance framework can 
be found in the Group’s tax strategy which is available on 
the Group’s website. 

IFRS16 
The  Group  is  finalising  its  impact  assessment  of  the 
accounting  standard  IFRS16  which  is  mandatory  for 
accounting periods starting 1 January 2019. The standard 
has no economic impact on the Group or on our cash 
flows. It does, however, have an impact on the way the 
assets, liabilities and the income statement of the Group 
are presented, as well as the classification of cash flows 
relating to lease contracts. 

Due to the profile of our current operating lease portfolio, 
it is anticipated that the impact of IFRS16 is likely to be 
marginally earnings dilutive in the early years of adoption, 
with  an  initial  1%-2%  impact  on  profit  before  tax.  In 
addition, if the balance sheet at 31 December 2018 had 
been  restated,  we  estimate  c£86.0m  of  right-of-use 
assets and c£92.5m of associated liabilities, would have 
been recognised in the Group’s balance sheet, resulting 
in a c£6.5m decline in net assets. 

Pensions 
During the year, the Group ceased to be a participating 
employer in the Marshall Group Executive Plan (‘Plan’) 
following a strategic decision taken in 2017 to crystallise 
and  pay  the  Group’s  residual  liability  to  this  historic 
defined benefit pension scheme. The aggregate amount 
paid by the Group to exit the Plan was in-line with the 
provision of £6.0m taken in last year’s accounts and was 
paid to the Trustees in February 2019. As a result, the 
Group no longer has any further obligations in relation to 
any defined benefit pension schemes. 

Richard Blumberger  
Chief Financial Officer  
12 March 2019 

26

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Jaguar E-PACE

Volkswagen I.D. VIZZION

ŠKODA VISION RS

Volvo XC40

27

Mercedes-Benz X-Class

Ford Focus

STRATEGIC REPORT

Principal Risks and Uncertainties

The Group faces a range of risks and uncertainties. The processes that the Board has established to safeguard both 
shareholder value and the assets of the Group are described in the Corporate Governance report. 

Set out below are the principal risks and uncertainties the Directors believe could have the most significant adverse 
impact  on  the  Group’s  business,  together  with  the  principal  controls  in  place  to  mitigate  those  risks.  The  risk  trend 
column indicates the Board’s view on whether, from a Group perspective taking into account mitigating actions, these 
risks  have  increased,  remained  relatively  stable  or  decreased  over  the  past  12  months. The  risks  and  uncertainties 
described below are not intended to be an exhaustive list.

STRATEGY  
AND  
BUSINESS  
RELATIONSHIPS

PEOPLE

ECONOMIC  
AND  
POLITICAL

IT  
AND  
CYBER  
SECURITY

ENVIRONMENTAL  
AND  
HEALTH & SAFETY 

Principal Risks  
and Uncertainties

FINANCE  
AND  
TREASURY

LEGAL  
AND  
REGULATORY  
COMPLIANCE

28

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Risk Area                  Potential Impact                    Mitigation/Controls                                   Risk Trend

STRATEGY AND BUSINESS RELATIONSHIPS

Failure to adopt the 
right business 
strategy and/or 
failure to implement 
strategy 
successfully

The Group misses its financial 
targets or is unable to invest in 
its businesses 

Reduction in confidence of key 
stakeholders (shareholders, 
brand partners, lenders, 
employees) 

Poor investment decisions/ 
failure to achieve targeted 
investment returns 

Manufacturer 
Relationships

Failure, or downturn in 
performance, of manufacturer 
partners impacting vehicle sales 
and profitability of those 
franchises 

Failure to maintain good relations 
with manufacturers impacting 
revenue and profitability 

Loss of a franchise leading to a 
reduction in revenue and 
profitability and the risk of vacant 
properties and/or onerous leases 

Poor manufacturer relationships 
impacting acquisition and/or 
growth opportunities

Annual strategy review by the Board 

Monthly reporting and monitoring of key financial 
information and performance 

Detailed business planning and due diligence prior to 
potential acquisitions 

Review of capital expenditure plans to ensure our 
return on capital objectives are achievable 

Capital investment appraisal process with Board 
review of major investments 

Diversity of franchises mitigates the cyclical nature 
of, and an over reliance on individual vehicle brands  

Focus on efficient use of working capital

Ongoing portfolio management focused on 
strengthening key franchise relationships/divestment 
of non-core businesses 

Diverse franchise representation avoids over reliance 
on any single manufacturer 

Close contact and regular review with manufacturers 
(through CEO, Operations, Commercial and 
Franchise Directors) to ensure our respective goals 
are communicated, understood and aligned

Failure to integrate 
acquisitions 
successfully 

Loss of key personnel/customers 

Brand partner relationship 
damage 

Reduced financial performance 
of acquired businesses 

Failure to achieve targeted 
synergies 

Damage to manufacturer and/or 
customer relationships

Detailed business planning and due diligence on 
potential acquisitions 

Integration plan developed prior to acquisition and 
implemented in a timely manner thereafter  

Group-wide single dealer management platform and 
Phoenix management system implemented 
immediately after acquisition 

Implementation of Group policies and procedures. 

Internal Audit verification of successful 
implementation of Group processes post-acquisition

Disruption to 
franchise business 
model

Alternative business models 
impacting franchised dealer 
model 

Direct sales channels 
circumventing franchised dealers 

Revenues and profits may fall 
due to competitor action 

‘Mobility as a service’ leading to 
reduced private vehicle 
ownership 

Electric and alternative fuel 
vehicles leading to a decline in 
sales for traditional vehicle 
manufacturers and/or reduced 
demand for aftersales services 

29

Ongoing development of customer experience to 
ensure the Group maintains a competitive advantage 

IT developments to maintain competitive advantage 
(e.g. development of website/Phoenix management 
system) 

Maintaining close relationships with manufacturer 
partners to ensure each party’s mutual aims are 
achieved 

Partnering with brands who are responding 
effectively to the cleaner technology agenda 

Connected car technology reinforces link between 
customers and manufacturers through franchised 
dealers 

Annual strategy review

STRATEGIC REPORT

Risk Area                  Potential Impact                          Mitigation/Controls                             Risk Trend

ECONOMIC AND POLITICAL

Monitoring of economic conditions with appropriate 
actions 

Stock management & monitoring (56 day stocking 
policy) with appropriately prudent financial provisions 

Maintaining close relationships with manufacturers 

Low level of net debt with facility headroom

Deterioration in 
economic conditions/ 
consumer confidence 

Increased inflation and falling consumer 
confidence leading to lower vehicle 
sales/margins and a reduction in 
revenue and profitability 

Reduction in used vehicle values 
impacting stock values 

Weakening Sterling impacting new 
vehicle prices and sales 

Manufacturers’ focus on the UK 
automotive retail market may decline 
leading to reduced output and sales 

Interest rate rises impacting availability 
and affordability of vehicle finance 

Increased costs of servicing the 
Group’s borrowings

UK’s withdrawal from 
the European Union 
(‘Brexit’)

Negative impact on UK economy: 
increased inflation and falling consumer 
confidence leading to lower vehicle 
sales/margins and a reduction in 
revenue and profitability 

Monitoring of economic conditions with appropriate 
actions taken 

Impact of a deterioration in consumer confidence 
mitigated by PCP renewal cycle (primarily in new car 
market) 

Reduction in used vehicle values 
impacting stock values 

Weakening Sterling impacting new 
vehicle prices and sales 

Manufacturers’ focus on the UK 
automotive retail market may decline 
leading to reduced output and sales 

Potential regulatory changes may 
impact franchising model in the UK 
(including potential changes to EU 
Block Exemptions) 

‘No Deal’ Brexit significantly more 
negative for automotive retail sector 
than a managed exit with a UK-EU free 
trade deal

Stock management and monitoring (56 day stocking 
policy) with appropriately prudent financial provisions to 
mitigate impact of falling vehicle values 

Maintaining close relationship with manufacturers and 
monitoring of manufacturers’ Brexit preparations 

The Group is not a direct importer of vehicles and parts 
from the EU; Extent of supply disruptions to the Group 
and its customers in a ‘No Deal’ Brexit scenario will 
depend on manufacturers’ ability to manage import 
challenges 

Diversity of the Group’s portfolio of brand partners which 
includes UK, EU and ROW manufacturers 

Increased Operating 
Costs

Increased operating and non-
controllable costs (e.g. employment 
costs, Apprentice Levy, business rate 
changes, IT and marketing costs) 
impacting profitability

Increased costs monitored and forecast in budgets.  

Cost reduction and efficiency initiatives to offset 
structural cost increases

FINANCE AND TREASURY

Liquidity & credit

Credit availability/withdrawal of financing 
facilities impacting trading ability 

Breach of covenants or inability to meet 
debt obligations 

Increased stock funding costs

Working capital management & cash flow monitoring 

Committed RCF and vehicle stocking facilities  

Maintaining strong relationships with funders 

Low level of net debt

Vehicle residual values 
volatility

Fluctuations in used vehicle values 
adversely impacting the value of  the 
Group’s vehicle inventory

Stock management & monitoring (56 day stocking 
policy) 

Risk reduced following disposal of Marshall Leasing

30

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Risk Area                  Potential Impact                    Mitigation/Controls                                   Risk Trend

LEGAL AND REGULATORY 

Legal & Regulatory 
Changes and 
Compliance

Non-compliance with key legal and 
regulatory codes (FCA, VOSA, ICO, 
etc.) leading to fines, litigation, 
authorisation suspension and/or 
reputational damage 

Group policies and procedures to minimise risk of 
non-compliance 

Training and development of employees 

Compliance committees to monitor compliance 

Regulatory intervention into the market 
(e.g. FCA motor finance review) may 
impact operations 

Compliance Team strengthened 

Internal Audit department strengthened 

Monitoring of regulatory announcements/market 
studies to assess potential changes and modifying 
operations to adapt to any implemented changes 

ENVIRONMENTAL AND HEALTH & SAFETY

Environmental and 
Health & Safety

Failure to ensure colleagues and 
customers safe places of work 
leading to accidents, litigation, 
fines and regulatory intervention 

Non-compliance with 
environmental laws & 
regulations leading to fines, 
penalties and compensation and 
clean-up costs and disruption to 
operations

Group health & safety policies and procedures to 
promote safe places of work 

EH&S audit programme across Group 

Regular inspection of plant and equipment 

Health & Safety team monitors compliance and 
promotes a health and safety helps culture 

Standing agenda item on main board and 
operational board 

Waste management procedures and employee 
training 

Environmental due diligence for new site acquisitions 
with appropriate environmental insurance in place for 
higher risk sites

IT AND CYBER SECURITY

Failure of  key IT 
systems

Loss of key information systems, 
downtime and business 
interruption

In-house IT team monitors systems and implements 
upgrade programmes 

Contingency and disaster recovery plans in place 

IT steering committee and IT risk register maintained 
to monitor risk 

Ongoing investment in IT infrastructure maintenance 
and upgrade 

Cyber Security

PEOPLE

Failure to attract, 
develop, motivate 
and retain key 
employees

Potential to corrupt, affect or 
destroy key systems and data 
(email, DMS & customer 
records), denial of service 
attacks and business interruption 
leading to lost revenue

Unified threat management - Firewall installed 

Clear protocols/policies in place regarding use and 
access to the Group’s IT systems 

Anti-virus software installed on all computers to 
reduce risk of viral infections 

Further investment in cyber security and systems 
resilience 

Loss of key personnel and 
skilled workers (e.g. technicians) 
impacting operational 
performance, and relationships 
with key brand partners and 
suppliers

Appropriate remuneration packages which reward 
performance and long term incentive plans for senior 
employees 

Guaranteed earnings scheme for new sales staff to 
assist recruitment and retention 

Promotion of “Great Place to Work” culture

31

GOVERNANCE

Board of Directors

1

2

3

4

1. Professor Richard Parry-Jones CBE 
Non-Executive Chairman and Chair of  the Nominations Committee 
Richard  has  had  a  long  and  distinguished  career  in  the  automotive  industry.  He  spent  over  30  years  in  senior  executive 
positions  at  Ford  Motor  Company,  including  Group  Vice  President  of  Global  Product  Development  and  served  as  its  Chief 
Technical Officer for 10 years. 

Richard’s non-executive career has included positions working with the Government as Co-Chair of the UK Automotive Council 
and in infrastructure sectors as Chairman of Network Rail and Chairman of Kelda Group Holdings and Yorkshire Water. He 
also  served  for  10  years  as  a  non-executive  director  of  GKN  plc,  a  global  leader  in  automotive  and  aerospace  systems, 
including  the  role  of  senior  independent  director.  Richard’s  other  current  roles  include  Visiting  Professor  at  Loughborough 
University and Chairman of the Faraday Challenge Advisory Board.  

Richard joined the Board as Non-Executive Chairman in January 2019. 

2. Daksh Gupta  
Chief  Executive Officer 
Daksh has over 26 years’ experience in the automotive retail sector and joined the Company in 2008 as its Chief Executive 
Officer. Daksh was a franchise director for Inchcape for seven years where he was responsible for the Volkswagen, Audi and 
Mercedes-Benz brands. Daksh also served as Chief Operating Officer of Accident Exchange Group plc and prior to joining the 
Group, was Group Managing Director for Ridgeway Group. Daksh was a director of Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited 
until 2 April 2015 and is vice president of the UK automotive industry charity, BEN. 

3. Richard Blumberger FCMA 
Chief  Financial Officer 
Richard has a wealth of experience gained from senior finance roles with major UK public companies. Before joining Marshall, 
Richard was Director of Group Finance at Mitie plc and previously held senior finance roles at Engie (formerly GDF Suez) and 
Balfour  Beatty  plc.  He  has  a  strong  understanding  of  multi-site  businesses  and  a  track  record  of  strategic  planning,  profit 
enhancement and extensive M&A experience.  

Richard was appointed to the Board as Chief Financial Officer in January 2019. 

4. Alan Ferguson  
Senior Independent Director and Chair of  the Audit Committee 
Alan is a non-executive director of Johnson Matthey plc, Croda International plc and AngloGold Ashanti Limited. He chairs the 
audit committees and is the senior independent director of both Johnson Matthey Plc and Croda International plc. Alan was 
chief financial officer and a director of Lonmin plc until December 2010, prior to which he was group finance director of the BOC 
Group plc. Alan spent 22 years in a variety of roles at Inchcape plc, including six years as its group finance director from 1999. 
Alan is a chartered accountant and sits on the Business Policy Panel of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland.  

Alan was appointed to the Board in March 2015. 

32

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

5

6

7

8

9

5. Sarah Dickins  
Non-Executive Director and Chair of  the Remuneration Committee 
Sarah has over 20 years’ HR experience across a broad range of sectors including retail, utilities and financial services. She 
spent  16  years  at Asda,  five  of  those  years  as  an  operating  board  member  responsible  for  people  operations  and  customer 
service for 150,000 colleagues. Sarah joined Provident Financial Group in 2012 as Executive People Director before becoming 
Group People Director at Bourne Leisure Limited in 2015.  

Sarah was appointed to the Board in March 2015. 

6. Kathy Jenkins  
Non-Executive Director 
Kathy joined Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited in April 2017 as Group HR Director. Before joining Marshall, Kathy spent 
14 years at Thales plc where she held a number of senior executive positions. She has also worked with Marconi plc.  

Kathy was appointed to the Board in May 2018 as a nominated director of Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited. 

7. Christopher Walkinshaw     
Non-Executive Director 
Christopher joined Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited in 1983 and has worked in all of the principal Marshall businesses, 
including Marshall Aerospace, Marshall Land Systems and, from 1994 to 2011, Marshall Motor Holdings. Christopher joined the 
senior team in Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Ltd in 2011 and has responsibility for external relations and communications. 
Christopher  is  Chairman  of  the  Regional  Employers  Engagement  Group  for  the  East  Anglian  Reserve  Forces’  and  Cadets’ 
Association,  Chairman  of  No.  104  (City  of  Cambridge)  Squadron Air  Cadets,  a  director  of  the  Cambridgeshire  Chambers  of 
Commerce, a Trustee of the Addenbrooke’s Charitable Trust and a Member of Anglian Learning.  

Christopher was appointed to the Board in July 2016 as a nominated director of Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited. 

8. Francesca Ecsery  
Non-Executive Director 
Francesca has over 20 years’ directorship experience in both blue chip companies and start-ups in the digital, retail, fast-moving 
consumer goods (FMCG) and leisure industries. She is a Harvard MBA, fluent in five languages and has special expertise in 
multi-platform consumer marketing, branding and commercial strategies. Francesca is currently a non-executive director of listed 
companies F&C Investment Trust plc and Share plc and was appointed as a non-executive director of Air France in May 2018. 
She was previously a non-executive director of Good Energy Group plc until December 2017. Her previous executive experience 
includes McKinsey, Pepsi Co, ThornEMI, Thomas Cook, STA Travel and many other consumer brands.  

Francesca was appointed to the Board in March 2015. 

9. Stephen Jones   
Company Secretary 
Stephen is a practising Solicitor and spent eight years as a corporate lawyer at Eversheds LLP. He also spent eight years as 
Group Counsel and Company Secretary at Automotive and Insurance Solutions Group plc.  

Stephen joined the Company in March 2015. 

33

GOVERNANCE

Directors’ Report

The  Directors  present  their Annual  Report  on  the  affairs  of  the  Group,  together  with  the  financial  statements  and 
Independent Auditor’s Report, for the year ended 31 December 2018 (the “Year”). 

Principal Activities 
The principal activity of the Company is that of a holding company. The principal activity of its subsidiary undertakings is 
the sale and servicing of passenger cars and commercial vehicle and associated activities. 

Results and Dividends 
The results for the Year are set out in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income. The Directors recommend 
the payment of a final dividend of 6.39p per ordinary share to be paid on 24 May 2019 to shareholders who are on the 
Company’s register at close of business on 26 April 2019. 

Business Review and Future Developments 
The review of the business and likely future developments is included within the Strategic Report. This also includes details 
of acquisitions, disposals and growth plans for the future. 

Going Concern 
After making appropriate enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources 
to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future and for at least one year from the date of these financial 
statements. For these reasons, they continue to adopt the going concern basis in the preparation of these financial 
statements. 

Directors 
Details of the current directors are set out on pages 32 to 33. The directors who served during the Year and subsequently 
are detailed below. 

Current Directors – Non-Executive Directors 
Richard Parry-Jones (Appointed 1 January 2019) 
Alan Ferguson 
Sarah Dickins 
Francesca Ecsery 
Kathy Jenkins (Appointed 23 May 2018) 
Christopher Walkinshaw 

Executive Directors 
Daksh Gupta   
Richard Blumberger (Appointed 2 January 2019) 

Other Directors who held office during the Year 
Peter Johnson (Resigned 31 December 2018) 
Christopher Sawyer (Resigned 23 May 2018) 
Mark Raban (Resigned 2 January 2019) 

In accordance with the Articles of Association of the Company adopted on 12 March 2015 (the “Articles”), having been 
appointed since the date of the last annual general meeting of the Company, Richard Parry-Jones, Kathy Jenkins and 
Richard Blumberger will each retire by rotation and each offers themselves for reappointment at the annual general meeting 
to be held on 21 May 2019 (the “AGM”). 

The interests of the Directors and their immediate families in the share capital of the Company, along with details of 
Directors share options and awards, are contained in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 53 to 60. 

Share Capital 
The authorised and issued share capital of the Company, together with the details of shares issued during the Year are 
shown in Note 28 to the financial statements. The issued share capital of the Company at 31 December 2018 was 
77,865,653 ordinary shares of 64p each.

34

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Substantial Shareholdings 
As at 11 March 2019, the Company had been notified of interests in excess of 3 per cent in the Company’s share capital 
by the following shareholders: 

                                                                                                                                                                          Percentage of  Existing 
Name                                                                                                   Number of  Ordinary Shares                       Ordinary Shares Held 

Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited                                                                        50,390,625                                                64.72% 

Union Investments and Development Limited                                                                    7,005,839                                                  9.00% 

Polar Capital LLP                                                                                                                 3,087,900                                                  3.97% 

Share Option Schemes 
Details of employee share option schemes are set out in the Remuneration Committee Report and in Note 31 to the 
consolidated financial statements. 

Charitable and Political Donations 
During the Year, the Group made the following charitable donations during the year: £8,000 (2017: £14,000). 

No political contributions were made during the Year (2017: £nil). 

Disabled Employees 
The Group gives full consideration to applications for employment from disabled persons where the candidate’s particular 
aptitude and abilities are consistent with adequately meeting the requirements of the job. Opportunities are available to 
disabled employees for training, career development and promotion. Where existing employees become disabled, it is 
the Group’s policy to provide continuing employment wherever practicable in the same or an alternative position and to 
provide appropriate training to achieve this aim. 

Employee Involvement 
During the Year the policy of providing employees with information about the Group has been continued through the 
newsletters ‘Marshall Matters’ and ‘Compliance Matters’, team briefings and through our global email network. Regular 
meetings are held between local management and employees to allow a free flow of information and ideas. We also 
participate in the Great Place to Work Institute’s employee engagement programme. Further details are set out in the 
Corporate Social Responsibility Section of this Annual Report. 

Anti-Bribery and Corruption 
The Group has in place an anti-bribery and corruption policy, the aim of which is to ensure that colleagues understand 
their obligations under anti-bribery legislation and includes authorisation and disclosure procedures around the provision 
and receipt of corporate hospitality and gifts. 

Disclosure of  Information to Auditor 
In so far as each of the persons who were Directors at the date of approving these financial statements is aware: 

• There is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditor is unaware; and 

• Each director has taken all steps that they ought to have taken to make themselves aware of any relevant audit 

information and to establish that the auditor is aware of that. 

Auditor 
A resolution to appoint Ernst & Young LLP as auditor will be put to the members at the AGM. 

AGM 
Notice of the AGM to be held on 21 May 2019 will be sent to shareholders with a copy of this Annual Report and will be 
made available on the Group’s website at www.mmhplc.com. 

By order of the Board 

Stephen Jones 
Company Secretary 
12 March 2019

35

GOVERNANCE

Corporate and Social Responsibility

Community 
Striving to have a positive impact on 
the communities in which we serve

MARSHALL MAKING A DIFFERENCE 
Our  values  are  incredibly  important  to  us  as  they 
determine  how  we  should  all  behave.  We  encourage 
colleagues to help us make a difference and stand out 
from the crowd. 

Whilst  our  focus  is  on  creating  an  environment  where 
colleagues enjoy coming to work and help us to meet our 
business objectives, we also believe it is important to give 
back to our communities and the environment in which we 
live. 

Group Giving 
We have been actively involved in supporting and raising 
awareness for the Motor and Allied Trades Benevolent 
Fund (‘BEN’) – since 1984. BEN is the UK’s dedicated 
charity  for  those  who  work,  or  have  worked,  in  the 
automotive  and  related  industries,  as  well  as  their 
dependants. In that time, we have raised over £800,000 
which includes the generous donations our colleagues 
make via payroll giving.  

CEO, Daksh Gupta, became a trustee and Vice President 
of BEN in October 2012. 

For the third year running we have run ‘BEN Week’ where 
every Marshall business did something to raise money and 
awareness for this charity. Colleagues dressed up, took 
part in sporting challenges and other fun activities during 
this  awareness  week.  This  was  a  tremendous  team 
building opportunity for colleagues, creating camaraderie 
among each other as well as with our customers. 

We have also supported Hats on 4 Mental Health for the 
past two years. BEN launched this initiative to help raise 
awareness of the mental health issues which people face 
every day. We are committed to helping our colleagues 
understand the importance of looking after their mental 
health and provide various sources of support should they 
need it. 

We have supported the Macmillan Coffee Mornings for 
many years which enables our businesses to get involved 
at  a  local  level,  bringing  colleagues  and  customers 
together. We have raised over £116,000 for Macmillan 
over this period. 

We also support national initiatives such as Red Nose 
Day, Children in Need, Wear it Pink for Breast Cancer and 
Christmas  Jumper  Day  for  Save  the  Children.  Each 
dealership  determines  how  they  are  going  to  support 
these events. This generally involves having a lot of fun 
and getting customers involved. For example, coming to 
work in fancy dress or taking part in a daring challenge 
such as head shaving or sitting in a bath of baked beans.  

Local Giving 
We encourage our colleagues to get involved with local 
causes which support the communities in which they work. 
By way of example,  a small team of colleagues from head 
office  slept  rough  for  a  night  to  raise  money  and 
awareness for the homeless charity Centrepoint raising 
over £12,000. 

‘Services  in  the  Community’  is  one  of  the  categories 
recognised as part of our Marshall Achievement, Values 
and Teamwork Awards. 

Whilst supporting BEN remains close to our hearts, giving 
colleagues the opportunity to get involved with other good 
causes is equally important. 

People

Innovation

Recognising that 
people are at the 
heart of our success.

Maintaining competitive 
edge through innovation 
and creativity.

Integrity

Customers

Upholding the 
highest standards of 
integrity and fairness.

Putting our 
customers 
above all else.

36

 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc | Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Hats on for World Mental Health Day 
Marshall Senior Management Conference 

37

Marshall sleepout for Centrepoint

GOVERNANCE

Colleagues 
Committed to attracting, developing and 
retaining the best talent to help drive our 
business forward in line with our values

MARSHALL PEOPLE 
Our Values 
We  seek  to  ensure  our  values  are  at  the  forefront  of 
everything we do. We encourage colleagues to uphold 
these values and behave in a way that brings them to life 
and supports our culture of being a great place to work, 
delivering first class customer service. 

Recruiting, retaining and developing our people 
We have a clear Colleague Value Proposition to attract 
the  best  talent  and  support  our  strategy  to  be  an 
employment destination. We use a range of tools and 
assessment methods to ensure we recruit people who 
can deliver their objectives in line with our values and 
business strategy. 

Every new colleague experiences a thorough induction 
programme which incorporates our history, values, aims 
and  objectives  as  well  as  a  structured  programme  of 
training and coaching relevant to their role, the brand and 
the team. 

Our  dedicated  team  of  HR  professionals  support  the 
business, aided by policies and practices to ensure we 
provide 
the  best  support,  benefits  and  career 
opportunities to our colleagues. 

Our  bespoke  Marshall  Learning  &  Development 
Academy provides opportunities for our colleagues to 
realise their potential and support their development to 
ensure they have a fulfilling career with us. 

In  addition,  all  new  Sales  Executives  attend  our 
residential Sales Orientation Programme before starting 
in their dealership. This is a rounded programme which 
not  only  includes  the  technicalities  of  the  role  but 
culturally what our customers should experience when 
they interact with us. This programme has significantly 
reduced our sales executive turnover since launching in 
June 2016. 

Recognising our people 
Our recognition programmes are designed to support our 
colleague  engagement  agenda.  These  programmes 
include Apprentice  of  the  Year Awards,  Long  Service 
Events and awards for demonstrating our values. 

Communicating with our people 
We  believe  communication  is  the  key  to  maintaining 
colleague engagement and our employment brand. We 
have an ethos of transparency and sharing news on a 
regular  basis  including  CEO  communications,  weekly 
bulletins, our Colleague magazine, intranet and regular 
team meetings. 

Diversity and our people 
We are committed to encouraging diversity and ensuring 
that  discrimination  has  no  place  in  our  business.  We 
want  every  colleague  to  feel  respected  and  able  to 
perform  to  the  best  of  their  ability.  We  do  not  make 
assumptions about a person’s ability to carry out his or 
her  duties  based  on  ethnic  origin,  gender,  sexual 
orientation, marital status, religion or other philosophical 
beliefs, age or disability. 

We expect all our colleagues to act with integrity and 
behave ethically in everything they do. To reinforce this, 
we  have  the  Marshall  Code  of  Conduct  which  is 
supported by an online programme which forms part of 
every new colleague’s induction. 

Engaging our people 
Our employment policies and practices are consistent 
with our values and culture, helping us to achieve our 
business objectives through engaged people. 

Since  2008  we  have  worked  with  the  Great  Place  to 
Work Institute’s Best Workplaces programme. This has 
given  us  the  opportunity  to  seek  feedback  from  our 
colleagues each year to measure levels of engagement 
and drive continuous improvement. 

Since 2010 we have achieved survey scores ahead of 
the 70% UK benchmark which determines a great place 
to work. In 2017 we achieved an overall score of 79% 
with a participation rate of 80%. In April 2018 we were 
proud to be ranked as a Best Large UK Workplace for 
the fourth year in succession. 

Our MAVTA programme (Marshall Achievement, Values 
and  Teamwork  Awards)  recognises  colleagues  who 
demonstrate  outstanding  achievements  in  Customer 
Service, Teamwork, Innovation, Leadership, Services in 
the 
and 
Business 
Environmental. 

Community, 

Excellence 

38

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc | Annual Report & Accounts 2018

39

GOVERNANCE

Health & Safety 
Making Health & Safety an 
integral part of Marshall’s day 
to day operation

MARSHALL EMBRACING SAFETY 
In 2018, we continued to increase the visibility of our Health, 
Safety & Environmental (HSE) team across the business. 
Targeted communications and visits to sites enable us to 
adopt a consistent approach to health and safety for all 
activities across our business. 

Our HSE team aims to provide support and direction to all 
sites by continually reviewing and improving our policies 
and  procedures,  supporting  and  advising  managers  to 
assist them in fulfilling their H&S responsibilities. 

The team also provide access to first aider, fire warden and 
risk assessor training. 

Our first aiders and fire wardens are all volunteers who 
undertake  these  roles  in  addition  to  their  usual  duties. 
Monthly checks of first aid boxes, firefighting equipment and 

emergency lighting, as well as weekly fire alarm tests are 
just  some  of  the  additional  tasks  these  colleagues 
undertake on our behalf. 

In addition, each of our sites has a trained risk assessor 
who is responsible for ensuring that the site specific risk 
assessments remain relevant and up to date for their site. 

The  HSE  team  also  monitor,  report  and  investigate  all 
incidents and where trends are identified an HSE Alert is 
created and shared with all colleagues. 

Planned preventive maintenance is organised by the HSE 
team,  working 
in  conjunction  with  our  business 
management  teams  and  our  approved  contractors  to 
ensure all relevant inspections and any identified remedial 
work is undertaken on time and certificated evidence is 
available. 

We track our Accident Frequency Rate (AFR) on a monthly 
and annual basis. The AFR is the measure of the number 
of accidents per 1m hours worked. The Motor Industry AFR 
average is currently 14.2 (taken from HSE document ‘Injury 
frequency rates’). Our AFR for 2018 was 8.67.

Environmental 
Embracing our environmental 
responsibilities

At Marshall we take our duty of care responsibilities very 
seriously and as such work closely with our approved waste 
contractor  to  provide  a  comprehensive  collection  and 
processing service of our hazardous and non-hazardous 
recyclable materials. 

MARSHALL GOING GREEN 
In 2018, our environmental focus has sharpened following 
the arrival of our new Environmental Co-ordinator, who has 
been working on increasing awareness across the business. 

In 2018 96.2% of our hazardous waste materials, such as 
engine oil, lead acid batteries, rags and absorbents were 
recycled and recovered. This equates to over 1.2m kg of 
waste which didn’t go to landfill.  

We  have  engaged  with  our  colleagues  to  reinvigorate   
Marshall LEAF (Lowering Energy to Aid the Future) which 
aims to lower the impact we have on the environment, by 
holding a competition for children related to our colleagues 
to create posters on saving energy and designing a new 
logo or slogan. 

This initiative complements our obligations to report under 
Energy  Savings  Opportunity  Scheme  (ESOS)  which  is 
designed to lead to greater energy efficiency, cost savings 
and carbon reduction. 

We  use  the  information  from  the  ESOS  surveys  when 
developing our new dealerships as well as refurbishments 
of existing sites. 

All of our new-build dealerships have been built to BREEAM 
"Very  Good”  rating.  BREEAM  is  the  world’s  leading 
environmental assessment method for buildings and sets 
the standard for best practice in sustainable building design, 
construction and operation and has become one of the most 
comprehensive  and  widely  recognised  measures  of  a 
building’s environmental performance.

Also  in  2018,  68.2%  of  our  dry  mixed  recycling  waste 
materials, such as paper, plastics, metals and cardboard, 
were recycled and recovered. This equates to over 1.4m kg 
of waste which didn’t go to landfill. 

We work with our Brand partners to ensure compliance with 
The Producer Responsibility Obligations (Packaging Waste) 
Regulations the aim of which is to reduce the amount of 
packaging waste that ends up in landfill. 

Additionally, we work closely with water retailers and local 
water  authorities  to  ensure  that  where  our  operations 
involve the discharge of waste water (e.g. valeting), we 
have obtained the correct level of consent and that our 
actions do not cause pollution via surface water drainage 
and other water courses. 

Finally, we work with the Environmental Protection Teams 
at various councils across England to ensure we have the 
relevant  permits  in  place,  under  the  Environmental 
Permitting (England & Wales Regulations 2007) at those of 
our dealerships which have a Bodyshop, or where we have 
independent  Bodyshop  operations.  This 
includes 
undertaking  regular  monitoring  to  ensure  we  remain 
compliant with the limits set within the permits. 

40

 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc | Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Health and safety statistics 2018 

Total number of incidents                                                   180 
Of which RIDDOR* reportable incidents                           20 
     • Fatalities                                                                     0 
     • Specified Injuries                                                        3 
     • Over 7 day absence                                                   10 
     • Non workers (contractors, visitors, third parties)      2 
     • Occupational Disease                                                1 
     • Dangerous occurrences reported under RIDDOR*  1 
Number of enforcement notices issued by HSE              0 
Number of prohibition notices issued by HSE                  1 

*Reporting of  Injuries, Dangerous Occurrences Regulations 2013

SUBSTANCES 
Control of Substances 
Hazardous to  
Health (COSHH)

ENERGY 
Reducing  
energy  
consumption

RECYCLING 
Waste  
and  
recycling

Continually minimising the impact of  our 
operational activities on the environment

41

 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

Corporate Governance

PRINCIPLES OF CORPORATE GOVERNANCE 
The Board recognises that applying sound governance principles in the running of the Group is essential. The Group has, since 
its admission to AIM in April 2015, adopted the QCA Corporate Governance Code for Small and Mid-Size Quoted Companies. 

An explanation of how these principles are applied by the Group are set out in the table below and the remainder of this corporate 
governance report. 

APPLICATION OF THE QCA CORPORATE GOVERNANCE CODE 

QCA Principle                                    Application by the Group 

1. Establish a strategy and 
business model which 
promote long-term value  
for shareholders

2. Seek to understand and 
meet shareholder needs  
and expectations

The  Group’s  vision  is  to  be  the  UK’s  premier  automotive  retail  group.  This  vision  is 
underpinned by five strategic pillars set by the Board: class leading returns; customer first; 
retailing excellence; people-centric; and strategic growth. 

The Group’s business model and strategy are set out both in its AIM Admission document 
(which can be found on the Group’s website at www.mmhplc.com) and the Strategic Report 
section of this Annual Report. 

In addition, the principal risks and uncertainties identified by the Board to the successful 
delivery of the Group's strategy, together with the principal controls in place to mitigate 
those risks, are set out on pages 28 to 31 of this Annual Report. The Board reviews the 
Group’s risk register at least twice a year as part of the annual and interim accounts 
processes.

The Group is committed to maintaining good relations with all its shareholders through the 
provision of interim and annual reports, other trading statements and its AGM. 

The  Chief  Executive  Officer  and  Chief  Financial  Officer  also  meet  with  the  Group’s 
institutional shareholders regularly to discuss the Group’s performance and business model 
and strategy and feedback from these meetings is reported to the Board. 

Each Board member attends the AGM where investors are invited to formally and informally 
field questions and discuss their views with the Board. 

In light of Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited’s (“MCHL”) aggregate shareholding in 
the Group, on Admission the Group entered into a Relationship Agreement (“Relationship 
Agreement”) with MCHL in order to regulate the relationship between MCHL and the Group 
and enable the Group to act independently of MCHL and its affiliates. Under the terms of 
this agreement, MCHL has the right, for so long as it owns 30% or more of the Ordinary 
Shares in the capital of the Company, to appoint two directors to the Board and one director 
to each of the committees of the Board, including the Audit, Remuneration and Nomination 
Committee. The Relationship Agreement will terminate in the event that MCHL ceases to 
own 30% or more of the ordinary shares in the capital of the Company. Further details of 
the  Relationship Agreement  can  be  found  on  page  13  of  the  Group’s AIM Admission 
Document. 

42

     
 
     
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

QCA Principle                                    Application by the Group 

3. Take into account wider 
stakeholder and social 
responsibilities and their 
implications for long-term 
success

The Group recognises that its long-term success relies on maintaining and building strong 
relationships  with  its  various  stakeholders,  including  in  particular,  its  customers, 
shareholders, suppliers and employees. 

As a franchise partner to global automotive manufacturers, the Group is focused on building 
and maintaining excellent brand partner relationships. The Group’s recent success and 
growth has been achieved as a result of strong and growing relationships with its brand 
partners. The Group has also invested in long-term strategic partnerships with other key 
suppliers, many of whom have worked with the Group over many years. 

The Group is committed to maintaining good employee relationships and employs a range of 
recruitment, communication and employee engagement initiatives designed to attract, recruit 
and retain employees. Further details of the Group’s employee engagement programme are 
set out in the Corporate and Social Responsibility section of this Annual Report. 

The Group’s participation in the Great Place to Work Institute’s Best Workplaces programme 
provides an effective means to seek feedback from colleagues each year and to measure 
levels of engagement and drive continuous improvement. 

The Group also recognises the potential impact of its operations on the environment and 
examples of how the Group seeks to minimise that impact are set out in the Corporate and 
Social Responsibility section of this Annual Report.

4. Embed effective risk 

The principal elements of the Group’s system of internal control are set out on page 47. 

management considering 
both opportunities and 
threats, throughout the 
organisation

5. Maintain a well-functioning, 
balanced team led by the 
Chair

6. Ensure that between them 
the Directors have the 
necessary up-to-date 
experience, skills and 
capabilities

In addition, the principal risks and uncertainties the Board believes could have the most 
significant adverse impact on the Group’s business, together with the principal controls in 
place to mitigate those risks, are set out on pages 28 to 31.  

The Chairman is responsible for leading the Board and its governance arrangements. 

The Group currently has eight directors, of which four are independent non-executives (being 
Richard Parry-Jones, Alan Ferguson, Sarah Dickins and Francesca Ecsery). Details of the 
directors, including their roles, committee memberships, skills and experience and are set out 
on pages 32 to 33 and their attendance record in the last financial year is set out on page 45. 

Details  of  the  Group’s  Board  Committees,  being  the Audit  Committee,  Remuneration 
Committee and Nominations Committee, are set out below. 

As stated above, under the terms of the Relationship Agreement, MCHL is entitled to appoint 
two nominated directors to the Board, so long as it holds 30% or more of the Company’s ordinary 
shares. Christopher Walkinshaw and Kathy Jenkins are the two nominated directors of MCHL. 

The Board is satisfied that it has a suitable balance between independence and knowledge 
of  the  Group  to  enable  it  to  discharge  its  duties  and  responsibilities  effectively.  The 
Nomination Committee is responsible for reviewing the Board’s balance and membership. 

Details of each Board member’s experience, skills and qualifications are set out on pages 
32 and 33 of this Annual Report. 

All  Directors  are  able  to  take  independent  professional  advice,  if  necessary,  at  the 
Company’s expense. In addition, the Directors have direct access to the advice and services 
of the Company Secretary, a qualified solicitor. 

The Board considers that collectively, it has the necessary experience, skills and capabilities 
to discharge its duties effectively.

43

     
 
     
 
     
 
     
 
GOVERNANCE 

QCA Principle                                    Application by the Group 

7. Evaluation of  Board 

performance

The Non-Executive Directors meet each financial year without the presence of the Executive 
Directors, during which the performance of Executive Directors is assessed and without the 
presence of the Chairman (to assess the performance of the Chairman). 

The Board intends to commence a formal Board evaluation process in 2019 which will 
include a review of development and mentoring needs of the Group’s management team. 

8. Promote a culture based on 

ethical values and 
behaviours

The  Group  has  clear  and  defined  values  based  on  people,  innovation,  integrity  and 
customers. 

9. Maintain governance 

structures and processes 
that are fit for purpose and 
support good decision-
making by the Board

10. Communicate how the 

Group is governed and is 
performing by maintaining 
a dialogue with 
shareholders and other 
relevant stakeholders

These values are embedded in the Group’s internal systems and controls (including its 
whistleblowing, anti-corruption and modern slavery policies) and in its HR policies which, 
collectively define how it behaves as a Group. 

Further details of our approach to embedding these values are set out in the Corporate and 
Social Responsibility section of this Annual Report. 

Details  of  the  Group’s  principal  governance  structures,  including  the  Board  and  its 
committees are set out below. In addition, pages 48 to 60 contain reports from the Audit and 
Remuneration Committees which set out their key areas of responsibility and activities. 

The Board considers that the Group’s governance structures and processes are fit for 
purpose and support good decision making by the Board. 

The Group communicates with shareholders through its Annual Report and Accounts, 
annual and interim announcements, the AGM and individual meetings with shareholders. 
Key  corporate  information  (including  all  Group  announcements  and  presentations)  is 
available on the Group’s website at www.mmhplc.com. 

The Board receives regular updates on shareholders’ views through briefings from the Chief 
Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and the Group’s brokers. In addition, both the 
Chairman and the Senior Independent Director are available to meet on an ad hoc basis 
with the Group’s principal shareholders. 

The Group communicates with its institutional investors through briefings with management 
at least twice a year, coinciding with the Group’s annual and interim results and at other 
times during the year. In addition, analysts’ notes and brokers’ briefings are reviewed to 
provide insight into investors’ views of the Group, its strategy and performance. 

44

     
 
     
 
     
 
     
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

THE BOARD 
The table below sets out details of all Directors who have served during the Year and their membership of Board Committees. 
This includes details of each member’s attendance at the ten board meetings held during the Year. There are separate attendance 
statements in respect of the Audit and Remuneration Committees on pages 48 and 53. 

Director

Date appointed

Role

Committees
(C = current chair)

2018 Board  
attendance 

Peter Johnson

27 June 2014

Non-Executive Chairman

Nomination Committee (C)

Alan Ferguson

11 March 2015

Senior Independent Director

Francesca Ecsery

25 March 2015

Independent Non-Executive

Sarah Dickins

11 March 2015

Independent Non-Executive

Christopher Sawyer* 2 April 2015

Non-Executive

Audit Committee (C)
Remuneration Committee 
Nomination Committee 

Audit Committee
Remuneration Committee 
Nomination Committee 

Audit Committee
Remuneration Committee (C) 
Nominations Committee 

Audit Committee
Remuneration Committee 
Nomination Committee 

10/10 

10/10 

10/10 

10/10 

**4/10 

Christopher
Walkinshaw*

12 July 2016

Non-Executive

Audit Committee (from May 2018) 10/10 
Nomination Committee 

Kathy Jenkins*

23 May 2018

Non-Executive

Remuneration Committee
(from May 2018) 
Nomination Committee  
(from May 2018) 

Daksh Gupta

1 October 2008

Chief Executive Officer

Mark Raban

2 April 2015

Chief Financial Officer

n/a

n/a

**5/10 

10/10 

10/10 

* Christopher Walkinshaw and Kathy Jenkins are nominated directors of  Marshall of  Cambridge (Holdings) Limited. Christopher 
Sawyer was also a nominated director of  Marshall of  Cambridge (Holdings) Limited until his retirement from the Board on 23 
May 2018. 

** Christopher Sawyer retired from the Board and Kathy Jenkins was appointed to the Board, on 23 May 2018. 

Peter Johnson resigned from the Board on 31 December 2018. Subsequent to the year end, Richard Parry-Jones was appointed 
to the Board as Non-Executive Chairman on 1 January 2019. Mark Raban resigned from the Board on 2 January 2019 and 
Richard Blumberger was appointed to the Board as Chief Financial Officer on the same date. 

Board decisions are generally on matters of strategy (including acquisitions and disposals), policy, people, performance, budgets 
and significant capital expenditure. Each director receives information on matters to be discussed (including Board reports from 
the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and Company Secretary) in advance of each Board meeting to ensure that 
there is a full debate at Board level and in particular so that the non-executive directors can contribute fully. 

The Board has formally reserved specific matters for its determination and has approved terms of reference for all Board 
Committees. 

All directors have access to independent professional advice, if they have the need to seek it. There is an induction process for 
new directors and training is available when required.

45

GOVERNANCE 

Chairman, Chief  Executive Officer and Senior Independent Director 
Richard Parry-Jones is Non-Executive Chairman and the Chief Executive Officer is Daksh Gupta. There is a formal division of 
responsibilities between the Chairman and the Chief Executive Officer. The Senior Independent Director is Alan Ferguson. 

Board Balance 
The Company currently has eight directors, of which four are independent non-executives. 

Under the terms of a Relationship Agreement (“Relationship Agreement”) with Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited (“MCHL”) 
(details of which are set out below), MCHL is entitled to appoint two nominated directors to the Board, so long as it holds 30% or 
more of the Company’s ordinary shares. The current MCHL-nominated directors are Christopher Walkinshaw and Kathy Jenkins. 

Performance Evaluation 
The Non-Executive Directors have met without the presence of the Executive Directors, during which the performance of executive 
directors was assessed.  The Board intends to conduct a formal evaluation of its performance in the coming year. 

Re-appointment of  Directors 
In accordance with the Articles, having been appointed since the date of the last annual general meeting of the Company, Richard 
Parry-Jones, Kathy Jenkins and Richard Blumberger will each retire by rotation and each offers themselves for reappointment 
at the AGM to be held on 21 May 2019. In addition, the Notice of AGM sets out those directors who are retiring by rotation in 
accordance with the Articles and are offering themselves for re-election at the AGM. 

BOARD COMMITTEES 
Nomination Committee 
The Company has established a Nomination Committee which comprises Richard Parry-Jones (Chair of the Committee), Alan 
Ferguson, Sarah Dickins, Francesca Ecsery, Christopher Walkinshaw and Kathy Jenkins. 

The Nomination Committee is responsible for reviewing the structure, size and composition of the Board, preparing a description 
of the role and capabilities required for a particular appointment and identifying and nominating candidates to fill Board positions 
as and when they arise. The Nomination Committee met on a number of occasions during the Year to discuss the appointment 
of the new Chairman following the announcement that Peter Johnson planned to retire and the appointment of the new Chief 
Financial Officer, following the resignation of Mark Raban. 

Audit Committee 
The Company has established an Audit Committee, which comprises Alan Ferguson (Chair of the Committee), Sarah Dickins, 
Francesca Ecsery and Christopher Walkinshaw. Further information on the Audit Committee is set out on pages 48 to 50. 

Remuneration Committee 
The Company has established a Remuneration Committee which comprises Sarah Dickins (Chair of the Committee) Alan 
Ferguson, Francesca Ecsery and Kathy Jenkins. Further information on the Remuneration Committee is set out on pages 
51 to 60. 

RELATIONS WITH SHAREHOLDERS 
The Group is committed to maintaining good relations with all its shareholders through the provision of Interim and Annual Reports, 
other trading statements and the Annual General Meeting. The Group also meets with its institutional shareholders regularly. 

In light of MCHL’s aggregate shareholding in the Group, on Admission the Group entered into the Relationship Agreement with 
MCHL in order to regulate the relationship between MCHL and the Group and enable the Group to act independently of MCHL 
and its affiliates. Under the terms of this agreement MCHL has the right, for so long as it owns 30% or more of the Ordinary 
Shares in the capital of the Company, to appoint two directors to the Board and one director to each of the committees of the 
Board, including the Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committee. The Relationship Agreement will terminate in the event 
that MCHL ceases to own 30% or more of the ordinary shares in the capital of the Company. 

Further details of the Relationship Agreement can be found in the Group’s AIM Admission Document which is available on the 
Group’s website at www.mmhplc.com. 

46

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 
The Annual General Meeting provides an opportunity for all shareholders to be updated on the Group’s progress and ask questions 
of the Board. 

FINANCIAL REPORTING 
The Board has ultimate responsibility for both the preparation of accounts and the monitoring of systems of internal financial 
control. The Board seeks to present a fair, balanced and understandable assessment of the Group’s position and its prospects 
and present price-sensitive information in an appropriate way. 

INTERNAL CONTROL 
The Board has ultimate responsibility for the Group’s system of internal control and for reviewing its effectiveness. However, any 
such system of internal control can provide only reasonable but not absolute, assurance against material misstatement or loss. 
The Board considers that the internal controls in place are appropriate for the size, complexity and risk profile of the Group. 

The principal elements of the Group’s internal control system include: 

• management of the day to day activities of the Group by the Executive Directors; aided by the Group’s bespoke management 

information system, Phoenix 2; 

an organisational structure with defined levels of responsibility; 

a forecasting process at each quarter end; 

an annual budgeting process which is approved by the Board; 

detailed weekly and monthly reporting of performance against budget and the prior year using Cognos; 

central control over key areas such as capital expenditure authorisation, contracts and financing facilities; 

formal accounting policies and procedures which are regularly reviewed and publicised in the business; 

an Internal Audit department which monitors compliance of Group processes and procedures and whose programme of 
work is overseen by the Audit Committee; 

a Compliance team to assess and monitor the Group’s compliance with its regulatory responsibilities with a particular focus 
on compliance with FCA and data protection requirements. 

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

The Group continues to review its system of internal control to ensure compliance with best practice, whilst also having regard 
to its size and the resources available. 

The principal risks and uncertainties identified by the Board are set out on pages 28 to 31. 

By order of the Board 
Stephen Jones 
Company Secretary 
12 March 2019

47

GOVERNANCE 

Audit Committee Report 

Alan Ferguson 
Senior Independent Director and  
Chair of the Audit Committee 

Audit Committee Members 
The  Group’s Audit  Committee  currently  comprises  myself, 
Sarah  Dickins,  Francesca  Ecsery  and  Christopher 
Walkinshaw,  who  joined  the  Committee  on  23  May  2018 
following the retirement of Christopher Sawyer from the Board 
and the Committee.  

With  the  exception  of  Christopher  Walkinshaw  (given  his 
position as a nominated director of MCHL), all members of the 
Audit Committee are considered to be independent. 

It  is  considered  that  the  Audit  Committee  possesses  the 
necessary  skills  and  experience  to  fulfil  its  responsibilities 
effectively  with  its  members,  through  their  other  business 
activities, having a wide range of financial and commercial 
expertise. In particular, as set out on page 32, my background 
was  as  an  experienced  Finance  Director  serving  on  the 
boards  of  a  number  of  large  companies  throughout  my 
executive  career.  I  am  the  current  chair  of  the  audit 
committees of Johnson Matthey Plc and Croda International 
Plc and was the chair of the audit committee of The Weir 
Group Plc until April 2018. 

Audit Committee Responsibilities 
The Audit Committee’s principal responsibilities are to: 

• monitor 

the 

integrity  of 

the  Company’s 

financial 
statements  (including  its  annual  and  interim  reports, 
interim management statements results’ announcements 
and  any  other  formal  announcement  relating  to  its 
financial performance); 

• make recommendations to the Board in relation to the 
appointment  of  the  external  auditor  and  oversee  the 
relationship with the external auditor including approving 
the  annual  audit  plan,  assessing  audit  quality, 
effectiveness and approving the audit fee. 

The Audit Committee’s responsibilities, its procedures and its 
authority are set out in formal terms of reference approved by 
the Board. 

Audit Committee Meetings 
The Audit Committee has an annual agenda of matters to be 
considered and is scheduled to meet three times each year 
and at any other time when it is appropriate to consider and 
discuss audit and accounting related issues. 

During the Year, the Audit Committee met formally three times, 
each member’s attendance at those meetings being set out 
below: 

Committee 
Member

Role

Attendance 
record 
whilst a  
Committee 
Member 

Alan Ferguson

Chair of the Committee

Sarah Dickins

Non-Executive Director

Francesca Ecsery

Non-Executive Director

3/3 

3/3 

3/3 

Christopher Sawyer  Non-Executive Director

*1/1 

review significant financial reporting issues, judgements 
and  estimates  as  described  in  Note  4  to  the  financial 
statements; 

Christopher  
Walkinshaw

Non-Executive Director

**2/2 

keep under review the effectiveness of internal controls 
and risk management systems; 

*  Retired on 23 May 2018 
**  Appointed on 23 May 2018 

•

•

•

review arrangements for its employees to raise concerns, 
in  confidence,  about  possible  wrongdoing  in  financial 
reporting or other matters; 

• monitor and review the effectiveness of the internal audit 
function, review and approve the internal audit function’s 
planned work and meet privately with the head of internal 
audit without the presence of management; and  

Audit Committee meetings are also attended (at the discretion 
and  invitation  of  the  Committee  Chair)  by  the  Chairman, 
Non-Executive and Executive Directors, the Head of Internal 
Audit and representatives of the Company’s external auditor.   

Between the end of the Year and the date of this report, there 
were two further meetings of the Audit Committee which were 
attended by all members. 

48

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Activities During the Period 
During the period since the last annual report to the date of 
this report, the Audit Committee has: 

•

•

•

•

•

•

reviewed  its  terms  of  reference  and  operated  in 
accordance  with  an  annual  agenda  of  matters  to  be 
considered by it; 

reviewed the key accounting judgements and estimates 
and going concern assessment in connection with the full 
year and interim results announcements; 

reviewed  and  after  challenge,  approved  the  external 
auditor’s audit plan for 2018, including their proposed fee 
and statement of independence. The Audit Committee 
also  reviewed  the  quality  of  the  external  audit  and 
recommended the re-appointment of the external auditor; 

reviewed non audit fees paid to the external auditor in the 
Year. These fees totalled £36,000 and related solely to 
the review of the Group’s interim results; 

considered  the  potential  impact  of  future  changes  to 
accounting standards, in particular IFRS 9 and IFRS 16; 

considered  the  recommendations  of  the  Financial 
Reporting  Council  following  its  thematic  review  of  the 
Group’s  2017  financial  statements  and  in  particular 
the 
implemented 
disclosure  of  the  allocation  of  goodwill  and  intangible 
assets by CGU in these financial statements. It is noted 
that the FRC’s review only covered specific disclosures 
relating to its thematic review; 

recommendations 

regarding 

its 

•

•

•

•

considered and subsequently recommended the taking 
of  an  exemption  from  an  audit  pursuant  to  S.479A 
Companies  Act  2006  in  respect  of  the  year  ending 
31 December 2018 for certain subsidiary companies as 
set out in Note 2 to the consolidated financial statements. 

approved the programme of work for internal audit in 2018 
and  considered  the  output  of  that  work.  In  addition,  it 
approved the internal audit plan for 2019; 

considered the Group’s risk management process and its 
effectiveness; and 

reviewed  the  Company’s  arrangements  to  enable 
employees to raise concerns about possible improprieties 
confidentially  including  the  use  of  an  independent 
organisation  to  provide  a  confidential  ‘whistleblowers’ 
hotline. 

The Committee receives reports from executive directors and 
also receives reports from, and periodically meets with the 
external auditor and the head of internal audit in the absence 
of management. In addition, as chair of the Audit Committee, 
I also meet with the external and internal auditor outside of the 
formal meetings. 

Audit issues considered by the Committee 
The Audit Committee has considered areas of significant complexity, management judgement and estimation applied in the 
preparation of the Group’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2018. In addition, the Audit Committee discussed 
with the Company’s external auditors those areas of audit focus described in the Independent Auditor’s Report on pages 62 to 71. 

Set out below are the key audit risks and judgements considered by the Audit Committee together with the Committee’s conclusions: 

Audit Risks Considered                                               Audit Committee’s Review and Conclusions 

Valuation of  inventory 
The  Group  recognises  a  provision  for  its  vehicle 
inventory.  When  determining  an  appropriate 
provision,  management  judgement  is  required  to 
assess  and  make  reasonable  assumptions  to 
determine the net realisable value of the Group’s 
vehicle inventory. 

     The Audit Committee reviewed the Group’s inventory provision in the light 
of external industry data, the inventory profile and the movement in the 
provision in the period. The Audit Committee discussed this analysis with 
management and with the external auditor. 

Conclusion: 
The Committee concluded that the judgements and assumptions applied 
to assess inventory valuation and calculate the net realisable value of the 
Group’s vehicle inventory were appropriate. 

The Audit Committee also noted that, overall, the assumptions used were 
consistent with those applied in previous years. 

49

GOVERNANCE 

Audit Risks Considered                                               Audit Committee’s Review and Conclusions 

Valuation and possible impairment of  goodwill 
and other intangible assets 
As  disclosed  in  Note  15  ‘Goodwill  and  Other 
Intangible Assets’ to the financial statements, the 
Group  has  goodwill  and  indefinite-life  intangible 
assets  arising  from  acquisitions  of  businesses 
totaling £112.2m. These assets are assessed for 
impairment every six months.  

Assessment for impairment involves comparing the 
carrying  value  of  the  asset  with  its  recoverable 
amount (the higher of value-in-use and fair value 
less costs to sell). Value-in-use is determined with 
reference to projected future cash flows discounted 
at an appropriate rate.  

Both the cash flows and the discount rate involve a 
significant degree of estimation, uncertainty as well 
as  judgemental  assessments  of  the  future  brand 
performance of individual vehicle manufacturers. 

Recognition and valuation of  provisions 
As disclosed in Note 24 ‘Provisions’ to the financial 
statements, the Group has provisions totalling £7.9m 
consisting  largely  of  property  provisions  and  a 
provision for the costs of exiting the defined benefit 
pension scheme. 

Provisions  are,  by  their  nature,  judgemental  and 
involve  estimates  of  likely  outcomes  and  an 
assessment  of  the  likelihood  of  future  events 
occurring. When determining the recognition and 
quantification  of  a  provision,  management  are 
required to make assumptions and estimates which 
may materially influence the financial statements. 

income 

from  volume 

Revenue recognition 
The  Group’s  core  revenue  streams  are  new  and 
used car sales, parts sales and servicing. The Group 
also  derives 
incentive 
arrangements  with  suppliers.  Given  the  business 
focus  on  sales  targets  and  incentives  and  the 
complexity and varied nature of the supplier incentive 
schemes,  together  with  the  materiality  of  these 
revenues  for  the  Group,  revenue  recognition 
represents an area of focus for the Audit Committee. 

The Audit Committee reviewed management’s process for reviewing and 
testing goodwill and other intangible assets for potential impairment. The 
Audit Committee also considered the adequacy of the disclosures in the 
Group’s financial statements in respect of the allocation of goodwill and 
intangible assets to CGUs, as well as in relation to key assumptions and 
sensitivities. 

The external auditor also independently reviewed management’s estimate 
of value-in-use, including challenging management’s underlying cash flow 
projections, long-term growth assumptions and discount rates. 

Conclusion: 
The Audit Committee concluded that the judgements and assumptions 
applied when determining the £9.3m impairment were appropriate and 
reasonable.  

The Audit Committee pays particular attention to management’s estimates 
and  judgements  in  this  area.  Based  on  detailed  reports  and  through 
discussion with both management and the Group’s external auditor, the 
Audit Committee reviewed and assessed the basis and level of provisions. 

Conclusion: 
The Audit Committee concluded that the judgements and assumptions 
applied to assess whether to recognise a provision and to estimate the 
amounts to be recognised, were reasonable and appropriate. 

The Audit Committee also noted that, where relevant, the assumptions 
used were consistent with those applied in previous years. 

The Audit Committee has reviewed the work of the external and internal 
auditors in this area and noted any deviation from the Group’s revenue 
recognition policy. 

Conclusion: 
Sales are individually immaterial, and the Audit Committee and based on 
the review work undertaken, did not consider revenue recognition to be a 
material fraud risk for the Group. 

Alan Ferguson 
Chair of the Audit Committee 
12 March 2019

50

     
 
     
 
     
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Remuneration Committee Report 

Sarah Dickins 
Non-Executive Director and  
Chair of the Remuneration Committee 

I  am  pleased  to  present,  on  behalf  of  the  Board,  the 
Remuneration Committee’s (the “Committee”) Remuneration 
Report providing details of the remuneration of the Directors 
for the Year and of our remuneration policy and principles. 

Remuneration policy 
The Committee regularly reviews its remuneration policy to 
ensure it supports achievement of the Company’s short-term 
financial goals and longer-term strategic objectives, including 
transformational activity such as the acquisition of SG Smith 
in  2015,  Ridgeway  in  2016  and  the  disposal  of  Marshall 
Leasing Limited in 2017. Although not bound by the same 
regulation  as  main  market  listed  companies,  including  the 
requirement to put remuneration policy to shareholder vote at 
least every three years, the Committee continues to monitor 
developments in regulation, governance and best practice, 
including  the  recently  updated  UK  Corporate  Governance 
Code  and  considers  the  current  remuneration  policy 
appropriate to the Company’s circumstances. 

Key Committee decisions and remuneration outcomes 
for the period to 31 December 2018 
As  outlined  in  the  Operating  Review,  the  Company  has 
continued its excellent track record of performance in 2018. 
Financial  highlights  include  like-for-like  revenue  growth  of 
1.2% and continuing underlying PBT of £25.7m representing 
an increase of 1.2% versus 2017.  

Annual  bonus  opportunity  and  Performance  Share  Plan 
(“PSP”) opportunities for both Daksh Gupta and Mark Raban 
remained the same as the previous year. 

Annual  bonus  opportunity  during  2018  was  based  on  the 
achievement of underlying PBT targets with bonuses of 96.3% 
of  maximum  awarded  to  the  Chief  Executive  and  Chief 
Financial Officer respectively in respect of performance in the 
year ended 31 December 2018. 

The Executive Directors also received an award under the 
Company's Performance Share Plan (‘PSP’) which is subject 
to  demanding  three  year  EPS  targets.  Subject  to  the 
performance condition being met, PSP awards will vest on the 
third anniversary of grant with any vested shares required to 
be held for a further 12 months post vesting. 

51

On 3 July 2018, we announced that Mark Raban intended to 
step down as Chief Financial Officer. In role since 2014, Mark 
played a pivotal role in the Group’s IPO in 2015, the successful 
acquisitions of SG Smith in 2015, Ridgeway in 2016, and the 
disposal of Marshall Leasing Limited in 2017. Despite Mark 
notifying  his  intention  to  step  down  in  July,  he  remained 
committed to the business throughout 2018 whilst a successor 
was appointed and has remained available to support the 
business  if  and  when  required.  The  Committee  therefore 
considered  him  eligible  to  participate  in  the  2018  annual 
bonus.  

Further, taking into account Mark’s contribution during his 
tenure, the Committee has exercised its discretion to permit 
the final tranche of his 2015 IPO Performance Awards to vest 
on 2 April 2019 and that subject to pro-rating for time and 
achievement of the attaching EPS performance target, his 
2016 PSP award will continue to its ordinary vesting date of 
13 June 2019. All other PSP awards made to Mark have 
lapsed. On behalf of the Committee, we thank Mark for his 
valuable contribution to the business and wish him well in 
the future. 

We welcomed Richard Blumberger as our new Chief Financial 
Officer on 2 January 2019. Richard joins on the same base 
salary  as  the  outgoing  Chief  Financial  Officer  and  will  be 
eligible  to  participate  in  the  2019  annual  bonus  plan  and 
receive  a  PSP  award  in  2019  as  per  the  terms  of  current 
remuneration policy. 

As  we  announced  in  December  2018,  Professor  Richard 
Parry-Jones CBE was appointed Non-Executive Chairman 
effective  1  January  2019  following  the  retirement  of  Peter 
Johnson on 31 December 2018. Richard was appointed on 
the  same  fee  as  the  outgoing  Chairman  of  £135,500  per 
annum. 

to 

for 

the  year 

remuneration  decisions 

Key 
31 December 2019 
The Committee continues to believe that the remuneration 
policy  remains  appropriate  and  having  reviewed  the  base 
salary for the Chief Executive Officer in the context of increases 
for  the  wider  workforce,  the  Committee  has  approved  an 
increase of 2%. The new Chief Financial Officer will not be 
receiving  an  increase  due  to  having  only  recently  been 
appointed. The maximum annual bonus potential for 2019 will 
be 125% of salary for the CEO and 100% of salary for the CFO 
based on PBT in line with the stretching business plan. 

GOVERNANCE 

The Committee intends to make awards in 2019 under the 
PSP subject to a maximum of 125% of salary in respect of the 
Chief Executive Officer. The Chief Financial Officer will receive 
100% of salary on the same basis as his predecessor. Any 
shares  awarded  this  year  to  Executive  Directors  that  vest 
under the PSP must be retained for a further year before they 
can be sold. 

Conclusion 
The directors’ remuneration policy which follows this annual 
statement  sets  out 
the  Committee’s  principles  on 
remuneration  for  the  future  and  the  annual  report  on 
remuneration provides details of remuneration for the period 
ended 31 December 2018. The Committee will continue to be 
mindful of shareholder views and interests, and we believe 
that  the  Directors’  remuneration  policy  is  aligned  with  the 
achievement of the Company’s business objectives. 

Sarah Dickins 
Chair of Remuneration Committee 
12 March 2019 

52

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Directors’ Remuneration Report

REMUNERATION GOVERNANCE 
Throughout the period 1 January 2018 to 31 December 2018, 
the Committee comprised three independent Non-Executive 
Directors:  Sarah  Dickins  (Chair  of  the  Committee),  Alan 
Ferguson  and  Francesca  Ecsery  alongside  Christopher 
Sawyer who was an appointed representative of MCHL until 
23 May 2018 when he was replaced by Kathy Jenkins.  

The table below sets out each member’s attendance record 
at Committee meetings during the financial year. 

Committee 
Member

Role

Attendance 
record 

Sarah Dickins

Chair of the Committee

Alan Ferguson

Non-Executive Director

Francesca Ecsery

Non-Executive Director

Christopher Sawyer

Kathy Jenkins

Non-Executive Director 
(resigned 24 May 2018)

Non-Executive Director  
(appointed 24 May 2018)

4/4 

4/4 

3/4 

2/2 

2/2 

The Chair, members of the management team, as well as the 
Committee’s  advisers,  are  invited  to  attend  meetings  as 
appropriate, unless there is any potential conflict of interest. 

The Remuneration Committee: Responsibilities 
The terms of reference of the Committee cover such issues 
as: committee membership; frequency of meetings; quorum 
requirements; and the right to attend meetings. In addition, the 
Committee has responsibility for, amongst other things: 

• making recommendations to the Board on the Company’s 

policy on remuneration for the Group; 

•

•

•

•

determining  and  monitoring  specific  remuneration 
packages  for  the  Chairman,  each  of  the  Executive 
Directors and certain senior management in the Group, 
including  pension 
rights  and  any  compensation 
payments; 

recommending and monitoring the level and structure of 
remuneration for senior management; 

recommending  and  overseeing  the  implementation  of 
share related schemes, including scheme grants; and 

ensuring  the  Committee  has  access  to  independent 
for 
remuneration  advice 
appointing a suitably qualified adviser. 

responsibility 

including 

The  Board  remains  responsible  for  the  approval  and 
implementation  of  any  recommendations  made  by  the 
Committee.  The  remuneration  of  Non-Executive  Directors 
other than the Chairman is determined by the Chairman of the 
Board and the Executive Directors. 

The Committee’s Advisers 
The  Committee  engages  external  advisers  to  assist  it  in 
meeting  its  responsibilities  and  has  retained  Willis Towers 
Watson to provide independent remuneration advice to the 
Committee.  Willis  Towers  Watson  are  a  signatory  to  the 
Remuneration  Consultants’  Code  of  Conduct,  and  the 
Committee  is  satisfied  that  the  advice  that  it  receives  is 
objective and independent. 

REMUNERATION POLICY 
The  overall  aim  of  our  remuneration  policy  is  to  provide 
appropriate incentives that reflect the Group’s performance 
culture and values, through a number of specific remuneration 
components (detailed in the table on the following pages). In 
summary, we aim to: 

•

•

•

•

attract,  retain  and  motivate  high  calibre,  senior 
management and to focus them on the delivery of the 
Group’s strategic and business objectives; 

set base pay having had due regard to the competitive 
talent  market  in  which  the  Company  operates  with 
incentive pay structured so that top quartile pay can be 
achieved for top quartile performance; 

be  simple  and  understandable,  both  externally  and  to 
colleagues; and 

achieve  consistency  of  approach  across  the  senior 
management population to the extent appropriate. 

In  determining  the  practical  application  of  the  policy,  the 
Committee considers a range of internal and external factors, 
including  pay  and  conditions  for  employees  generally, 
shareholder feedback, and appropriate market comparisons 
with remuneration practices in FTSE-listed, AIM-listed and 
other automotive-based companies. 

The Committee is satisfied that this policy successfully aligns 
the interests of Executive Directors, senior managers, and 
other employees with the long-term interests of shareholders, 
total 
by  ensuring 
remuneration is directly linked to the Group’s performance 
over both the short and the long term. 

that  an  appropriate  proportion  of 

53

 
 
GOVERNANCE 

REMUNERATION POLICY (continued) 
Future Policy Table 
The main elements of the remuneration package of Executive Directors are set out below: 

Purpose and link to  
strategy

BASIC SALARY 

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance metrics 

Attract and retain high calibre 
Executive Directors to deliver 
strategy.

Paid  in  12  equal  monthly 
instalments during the year.

ANNUAL BONUS  

Incentivises  achievement  of 
by 
business 
for 
providing 
performance  against  annual 
financial targets.

objectives 
reward 

Paid in cash after the end of 
the financial year to which it 
relates. 

Recovery  and  withholding 
provisions apply.

Reviewed annually to reflect 
and 
responsibility 
role, 
performance of the individual 
and  the  Group,  and  to  take 
into account rates of pay for 
comparable  roles  in  similar 
companies.  When  selecting 
comparators, the Committee 
has  regard  to,  inter  alia,  the 
Group’s revenue, profitability, 
market  worth  and  business 
sector. There is no prescribed 
maximum  increase.  Annual 
rates are set out in the annual 
report on remuneration for the 
current year and the following 
year.

It is the policy of the committee 
to  cap  maximum  annual 
bonuses. The  levels  of  such 
caps  are  reviewed  annually 
and are set at an appropriate 
percentage  of  annual  salary. 
Currently the maximum bonus 
is  125%  of  base  salary  in 
respect of the Chief Executive 
Officer and 100% in respect of 
the Chief Financial Officer.

None.

Performance 
is  normally 
measured  over  one  year, 
financial 
based  solely  on 
targets (e.g. profit before tax). 

The Committee sets threshold 
and maximum targets on an 
annual basis. 

threshold 

A  sliding  scale  operates 
between 
and 
maximum  performance.  No 
is  payable  where 
bonus 
performance  is  below  the 
threshold. 

Payment  of  any  bonus  is 
subject 
the  overriding 
discretion of the Committee

to 

54

 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

REMUNERATION POLICY (continued) 
Future Policy Table (continued) 

Purpose and link to  
strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance metrics 

LONG-TERM INCENTIVES – MMH PERFORMANCE SHARE PLAN 

Alignment  of  interests  with 
shareholders  by  providing 
long-term incentives designed 
to  incentivise  and  recognise 
execution  of  the  business 
strategy over the longer-term.

BENEFITS 

Provide  benefits  consistent 
with  role  and  in  support  of 
the  personal  health  and 
well-being of employees.

PENSION 

Attract and retain Executive 
Directors for the long term by 
for 
providing 
retirement.

funding 

Grant  of  £nil  cost  options 
the  PSP.  Options 
under 
normally  vest  3  years  from 
grant 
the 
achievement of performance 
conditions  and  continued 
employment. 

subject 

to 

A  12  months  post-vesting 
holding  period  applies  for 
awards made from 2016. 

A dividend equivalent applies. 

Recovery  and  withholding 
the 
provisions  apply  at 
discretion  of  the  Committee 
within three years of vesting.

Currently  these  consist  of 
holiday  entitlement,  health 
life  assurance 
insurance, 
income 
and 
premiums 
protection 
insurance.  The 
Committee reviews the level 
of benefit provision from time 
to time and has the flexibility 
to add or remove benefits to 
reflect  changes  in  market 
practices  or  the  operational 
needs of the Group.

All  Executive  Directors  are 
entitled  to  participate  in  the 
defined 
Company’s 
contribution pension scheme 
or to receive a cash allowance 
in lieu of pension contributions. 

base 

Only 
pensionable.

salary 

is 

150%  of  base  salary  (up  to 
in 
200%  of  base  salary 
exceptional circumstances) in 
any financial year. 

Current award levels are set 
out  in  the Annual  Report  on 
Remuneration.

is 

subject 

Vesting 
to 
continuous employment and 
targets linked to the strategy 
of 
the  business.  Current 
targets  are  based  on 
achievement  of  growth  in 
earnings  per  share,  but  the 
Committee  may  vary  the 
targets.  25%  vests 
for 
achieving 
threshold 
performance,100% vests for 
achieving 
maximum 
performance.

The cost of providing benefits 
is borne by the Company and 
varies from time to time.

None.

The Chief Executive receives 
a  16%  of  base  salary 
contribution. 

None. 

whereby 

The  Chief  Financial  Officer 
participates in the Company’s 
defined  contribution  pension 
the 
scheme 
Company  makes  an  8%  of 
base  salary  contribution, 
conditional  upon  the  Chief 
Financial  Officer  making  a 
matched contribution of 8%.

55

 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

REMUNERATION POLICY (continued) 
Future Policy Table (continued) 

Purpose and link to  
strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance metrics 

SHARE OWNERSHIP GUIDELINES 

Increase alignment between 
the Executive Directors and 
shareholders.

Executive  Directors 
are 
expected to retain 50% of the 
net of tax vested PSP shares 
until the guideline level is met.

NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR FEES (“NED”) 

At least 100% of base salary 
for Executive Directors. 

None.

To attract NEDs who have a 
broad  range  of  experience 
and  skills  to  oversee  the 
implementation 
our 
strategy  and  provide  strong 
performance stewardship

of 

NED fees are determined by 
the  Board  (excluding  NEDs) 
within the limits set out in the 
Articles of Association and are 
paid  in  12  equal  monthly 
instalments during the year.

None.

Annual  rate  set  out  in  the 
annual report on remuneration 
for  the  current  year  and  the 
following year. No prescribed 
maximum annual increase.

Directors’ Service Contracts, Notice Periods and Termination Payments 

Provision

Details 

Notice periods in Executive Directors’ 
service contracts 

Maximum of 12 months by Company or Executive Director. Executive Directors 
may be required to work during the notice period. 

Compensation for loss of office 

In the event of termination, service contracts provide for payments of base salary, 
pension and benefits only over the notice period. 

Treatment  of  annual  bonus  on 
termination 

Treatment of unvested PSP awards 

There is no contractual right to any bonus payment in the event of termination 
although in certain "good leaver" circumstances the Remuneration Committee 
may exercise its discretion to pay a bonus for the period of employment and based 
on performance assessed after the end of the financial year. 

The default treatment for any entitlements under the PSP is that any outstanding 
awards  lapse  on  cessation  of  employment.  However,  in  certain  prescribed 
circumstances, or at the discretion of the Committee “good leaver” status can be 
applied.  In  these  circumstances  a  participant’s  awards  vest  subject  to  the 
satisfaction of the relevant performance criteria and, ordinarily, on a time pro-rata 
basis, with the balance of the awards lapsing. 

Outside appointments 

Other directorships have been permitted with prior agreement: 

– Daksh Gupta is a director of BEN – Motor and Allied Trades Benevolent Fund. 

– Mark Raban is a director of Precise Finance Limited. Precise Finance Limited 
is the company owned by Mr Raban and used to provide consultancy services 
prior to his appointment to Marshall Motor Holdings plc. 

Non-executive directors 

All Non-Executives are subject to re-election every three years. No compensation 
payable if required to stand down. 

56

 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

REMUNERATION POLICY (continued) 
Directors’ Service Contracts, Notice Periods and Termination Payments (continued) 

In the event of the negotiation of a compromise or settlement agreement between the Company and a departing Director, the 
Committee may make payments it considers reasonable in settlement of potential legal claims. Such payments may also include 
reasonable reimbursement of professional fees in connection with such agreements. 

The Committee may also include the reimbursement of fees for professional or outplacement advice in the termination package, 
if it considers it reasonable to do so. It may also allow the continuation of benefits for a limited period. 

Dates of  appointment 

Director                                           Date of  appointment                           Date of  resignation as a director 

D Gupta                                                 1 October 2008                                           – 

P Johnson                                              27 June 2014                                              31 December 2018 

M Raban                                                2 April 2015                                                 2 January 2019 

A Ferguson                                            11 March 2015                                            – 

S Dickins                                                11 March 2015                                            – 

F Ecsery                                                 25 March 2015                                           – 

C Sawyer                                               2 April 2015                                                 23 May 2018 

C Walkinshaw                                        12 July 2016                                               – 

K Jenkins                                               23 May 2018                                               –

Copies of Directors’ service contracts and letters of appointment are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office. 

57

 
GOVERNANCE 

Annual Report on Remuneration 
Single total figure of  remuneration 
The table below sets out the single total figure of remuneration and breakdown for each Director in respect of the 12 month period 
ending 31 December 2018. 

                                                      Basic                                                                     Annual       Long term                  
                                                     salary         Fees       Benefits        Pension        bonuses      incentives3        Total 
                                                       £’000        £’000             £’000            £’000             £’000                £’000        £’000 

Executive Directors 

D Gupta                                                416.9                –                 18.0                67.0               501.7               1,021.6      2,025.5 

M Raban1                                              260.6                –                   3.0                21.0               250.9                  302.7         838.2 

Total                                                      677.5                –                 21.0                88.0               752.6               1,324.3      2,863.4 

Non-Executive Directors 

P Johnson                                                    –         135.5                      –                     –                      –                          –         135.5 

A Ferguson                                                  –           59.5                      –                     –                      –                          –           59.5 

S Dickins                                                      –           49.5                      –                     –                      –                          –           49.5 

F Ecsery                                                       –           42.0                      –                     –                      –                          –           42.0 

C Sawyer2                                                    –           17.5                      –                     –                      –                          –           17.5 

C Walkinshaw1                                             –           40.0                      –                     –                      –                          –           40.0 

K Jenkins1                                                                 25.8                                                                                                              25.8 

Total                                                             –         369.8                      –                     –                      –                          –         369.8 

Aggregate directors  
emoluments                                        677.5         369.8                 21.0                88.0               752.6               1,324.3      3,233.2 

The benefits above include items such as medical cover, life assurance premiums and income protection insurance. 

1 Mark Raban has a 12 month notice period and although he served notice on 3 July 2018, he continued to fulfil the position 
of  CFO for the remainder of  2018 until a successor was appointed. Mark has agreed to be available to support the new 
CFO for the remainder of  his notice period. Salary, pension and benefits will be paid in the ordinary manner during the 
12 month notice period (subject to mitigation should he take up alternative employment during his remaining notice period) 
and the Committee exercised its discretion to consider him eligible to receive an annual bonus in respect of  2018.   

2 Christopher Walkinshaw and Kathy Jenkins are nominated directors of  Marshall of  Cambridge (Holdings) Ltd with the fee 
payable in respect of  their undertakings as a Non-Executive Director payable to Marshall of  Cambridge (Holdings) Ltd. 

3. Market value of  share options exercised during the Year (based on the Company’s share price on the date of  exercise) plus 
the value of  dividend equivalents on those options (which were settled in cash). Included within the figures quoted for long 
term incentives in the prior year was an amount of  £260k which was the market value of  share options on the date of  their 
vesting, not their exercise. These options were exercised in the current year and are correctly included within the totals 
presented above.  

LTIP awards 
Details of LTIP awards granted during the year are as follows: 

                                                                                                                                                 Market 
                                                                                                                                                   value  
                                                                                             Earliest          Exercise             on date           Number of   
                                                                      Date of           exercise                price            of  grant                options  
                                              Scheme             grant                  date            (pence)             (pence)                  grants 

D Gupta                         2018 LTIP award        17-Apr-18           17-Apr-21                     £Nil                    155p                   328,845 

M Raban1                       2018 LTIP award        17-Apr-18           17-Apr-21                     £Nil                    155p                   164,423 

1 Mark Raban’s 2018 LTIP awards lapsed during the Year. 

Awards vest for achieving growth in EPS from 2018 to 2020; 25% vest for achieving EPS growth of 1.3% per annum increasing 
to 100% vesting for achieving EPS growth of 6.0% per annum.

58

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

The movement in directors’ LTIP Awards during the year are as follows: 

                                                                                             Number           Number            Number                              
                                                                                              granted         exercised              lapsed            Number at 
                                                                                               during              during               during       31 December   
                                      Number at 1 January 2018           the year           the year            the year                     2018 

D Gupta                                                             1,487,703              328,845              604,026                          –                1,212,522  

M Raban                                                               587,253              164,423              178,971               335,072                   237,633  

Statement of  Directors’ Shareholding 
Our Executive Directors are expected to build up and maintain a 100% of salary shareholding in the Company and are expected 
to retain 50% of the net of tax vested PSP shares until the guideline level is met. The Directors who held office at 31 December 
2018 and their connected persons had interests in the issued share capital of the Company as at 31 December 2018 as follows: 

                     Number of   
                      ordinary                Number of                                                            Number of   
                        shares                   ordinary                                                               ordinary  
                          held                       shares                  Market                                     shares 
                    beneficially               acquired             Purchases         Disposals     beneficially                            LTIP Interests1                             Total 
                          as at                  on exercise              during               during            held at                                                     Vested but      interest in 
                       31/12/17                of  options             the year            the year          31/12/18                    Unvested             unexercised            shares 

P Johnson         175,328                            –                              –                           –                  175,328                              –                                   –                     175,328  

D. Gupta            843,138                      320,134                        –                           –                1,163,272                      1,212,522                           –                  2,375,794  

M Raban2           61,726                        94,855                         –                           –                  156,581                         237,633                             –                     394,214 

A Ferguson         58,557                             –                              –                           –                   58,557                               –                                   –                       58,557  

S Dickins              6,711                              –                              –                           –                    6,711                                 –                                   –                         6,711  

F Ecsery              2,013                              –                              –                           –                    2,013                                –                                   –                         2,013  

The middle market price of the shares as at 31 December 2018 was 156p and the range in respect of the 12 month period ending 
31 December 2018 was 122.5p to 175.5p. 

1

2

These include the 2018, 2017 and 2016 LTIP Awards along with the IPO Performance Awards which vest subject to growth 
in the Company’s underlying basic Earnings Per Share (EPS). 25% of  the award vests for achieving growth in underlying 
basic EPS of  1.3%, CPI plus 1.0%, CPI plus 3.0% and CPI plus 4.0% per annum respectively, increasing to 100% vesting 
for achieving growth of  6.0%, CPI plus 5.0%, CPI plus 8.0% and CPI plus 10.0% per annum respectively over a three year 
performance period. 50% of  the IPO Performance Awards vested on the third anniversary of  Admission and the remaining 
50% will vest on the fourth anniversary subject to continued employment. A 12 month holding period applies to the 2016, 
2017 and 2018 LTIP Awards. 

Taking into account Mark’s contribution during his tenure, the Committee has exercised its discretion to permit the final 
tranche’ of  his 2015 IPO Performance Awards to vest on 2 April 2019 and that subject to pro-rating for time and achievement 
of  the attaching EPS performance target, his 2016 PSP award will continue to its ordinary vesting date of  13 June 2019. All 
other PSP awards made to Mark have lapsed. 

The Committee has discretion to adjust the aforementioned performance targets to reflect the impact of events which occur after 
the date of grant in order to take into account the impact of events such as material acquisitions and disposals made by the 
Group and to ensure that the adjusted targets are no more difficult or easier to satisfy than they would have otherwise been.

59

GOVERNANCE 

Implementation of  remuneration policy for the year ending 31 December 2019 
The annual salaries and fees to be paid to directors in the year ending 31 December 2019 are set out below, together with any 
increase expressed as a percentage. 

                                                                           31 December 2019               31 December 2018                    Increase 

 Executive Directors                                                                           £'000                                          £'000                                   % 

D Gupta                                                                                                425.3                                          416.9                                    2 

R Blumberger1                                                                                     260.0                                                 –                                 n/a 

  Non-executive Directors                                                                   £'000                                          £'000                                   % 

R Parry-Jones1                                                                                    135.5                                                 –                                 n/a 

A Ferguson                                                                                             60.3                                            59.5                                    2 

S Dickins                                                                                                50.3                                            49.5                                    2 

F Ecsery                                                                                                 42.8                                            42.0                                    2 

C Walkinshaw2                                                                                       40.0                                            40.0                                    0 

K Jenkins2                                                                                              40.0                                            40.0                                    0 

1 Richard Parry-Jones was appointed on 1 January 2019. Richard Blumberger was appointed on 2 January 2019. 

2 Christopher Walkinshaw and Kathryn Jenkins are nominated directors of  Marshall of  Cambridge (Holdings) Ltd with the fee 
payable in respect of  their undertakings as a Non-Executive Director payable to Marshall of  Cambridge (Holdings) Ltd. 

The maximum potential annual bonus for the year ending 31 December 2019 will be 125% of salary for the CEO and 100% of 
salary for the CFO. Awards are determined based on PBT targets. Recovery and withholding provisions will apply. 

The Committee intends to grant options under the PSP in 2019. These options will be £nil cost options over a value of shares 
subject to a maximum of 125% of salary in respect of the Chief Executive Officer and 100% of salary in respect of the Chief 
Financial Officer where the vesting is subject to performance targets. 

By order of the Board 

Sarah Dickins 
Chair of Remuneration Committee 
12 March 2019 

60

 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the financial statements in accordance with applicable law 
and regulations. 

The Directors are required to prepare Consolidated financial statements for each financial year in accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union. The Directors have elected to prepare the parent 
company financial statements in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards and applicable law). Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless 
they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the Group and Company and of the profit and loss of the Group for that 
period. In preparing those Consolidated financial statements, the Directors are required to: 

•

•

•

•

select and apply accounting policies in accordance with IAS 8; 

present  information,  including  accounting  policies,  in  a  manner  that  provides  relevant,  reliable,  comparable  and 
understandable information; 

provide additional disclosures when compliance with the specific requirements in IFRSs are insufficient to enable users to 
understand the impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions on the entity’s financial position and financial 
performance; and 

state that the group has complied with IFRS, subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the financial 
statements. 

In preparing the Company financial statements, the Directors are required to: 

•

select suitable accounting policies and apply them consistently; 

• make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; 

•

•

state whether applicable UK Accounting Standards have been followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and 
explained in the financial statements; and 

prepared the financial statements on a going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the company will not 
continue in business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records which are sufficient to disclose with reasonable accuracy 
at any time the financial position of the Company and enable them to ensure that the financial statements comply with the 
Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. They are also responsible 
for safeguarding the assets of the company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and 
other irregularities. 

61

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT  
TO THE MEMBERS OF MARSHALL  
MOTOR HOLDINGS PLC

What we have audited 
We have audited the financial statements of Marshall Motor Holdings plc. for the year ended 31 December 2018 which comprise: 

Group                                                                                           Parent company 

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income  

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity                            Parent Company Statement of Changes in Equity 

Consolidated Statement of Financial Position                             Parent Company Statement of Financial Position 

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement 

Related notes 1 to 34 to the consolidated financial                     Related notes 1 to 15 to the Company financial statements 
statements, including a summary of significant                           including a summary of significant accounting policies 
accounting policies 

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the group financial statements is applicable law 
and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union. The financial reporting framework 
that has been applied in the preparation of the parent company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards, including FRS 102 “The Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland” 
(United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 

Opinion 
In our opinion: 

•

•

•

•

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 
31 December 2018 and of the group’s profit for the year then ended; 

the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union; 

the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice; and 

the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 

Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under those standards are described further in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements 
section of our report below. We are independent of the group and parent company in accordance with the ethical requirements 
that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed 
entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. 

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. 

Conclusions relating to going concern 
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the ISAs (UK) require us to report to you where: 

•

•

the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is not appropriate; or 

the directors have not disclosed in the financial statements any identified material uncertainties that may cast significant 
doubt about the group’s or the parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting for a 
period of at least twelve months from the date when the financial statements are authorised for issue. 

62

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Overview of  our audit approach 
Materiality                     •       Overall group materiality of £1.28m (2017: £1.45m) which represents approximately 5% (2017: 5%) 

of Underlying Profit before Tax. 

                                       •       Any audit differences in excess of £64k (2017: £73k) are reported to the audit committee. 

Audit scope                  •       We performed an audit of the complete financial information of 14 (2017:14) full scope components 

and performed audit procedures for a further 21 (2017:22) review scope components. 

                                       •       The full scope components accounted for 94% (2017: 92%) of Underlying Profit before Tax, 92% 

(2017: 92%) of External Revenue and 97% (2017: 97%) of Total Net Assets. 

Key audit matters        •       Valuation of inventory 

                                       •       Assessment of the carrying value of goodwill and other intangible assets 

                                       •       Misstatement of provisions and head office accruals  

                                       •       Revenue recognition, including manufacturer’s rebates and bonuses 

Our application of  materiality 
We apply the concept of materiality in planning and performing the audit, in evaluating the effect of identified misstatements on 
the audit and in forming our audit opinion. 

Materiality 
The magnitude of  an omission or misstatement that, individually or in the aggregate, could reasonably be expected to influence 
the economic decisions of  the users of  the financial statements. Materiality provides a basis for determining the nature and extent 
of  our audit procedures. 

We determined materiality for the Group to be £1.28 million (2017: £1.45 million), which is approximately 5% (2017: 5%) of 
Underlying Profit before Tax. The rationale for using Underlying Profit before Tax as our basis for materiality is that it provides a 
consistent year on year approach, excluding gains and losses from transactions which are considered one off in nature by 
management and that are unlikely to reoccur, which can be significant compared to underlying trading. We review the assessment 
of these items before inclusion in our materiality calculation. There were no changes in the approach year on year. 

We determined materiality for the Parent Company to be £1.28 million. This is capped at group materiality. 

See breakdown below for details of adjustments made 

63

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

As part of our audit planning, we reported to the audit committee on 3 August 2018, an initial materiality calculation of £1.30m. 
This amount was based on the estimated annualised profit before tax. 

During the course of our audit, we reassessed initial materiality and calculated a reduction from £1.30m to a final figure of £1.28m. 
This was primarily the result of estimation used when annualising the materiality base during the planning phase of the audit 
when compared to the actual full year results observed. 

Performance materiality 
The application of  materiality at the individual account or balance level. It is set at an amount to reduce to an appropriately low 
level the probability that the aggregate of  uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceeds materiality. 

On the basis of our risk assessments, together with our assessment of the Group’s overall control environment, our judgement 
was that performance materiality should be set at 50% (2017: 50%) of our planning materiality, namely £641k (2017: £725k). 

Audit work at component locations for the purpose of obtaining audit coverage over significant financial statement accounts is 
undertaken based on a percentage of total performance materiality. The performance materiality set for each component is based 
on the relative scale and risk of the component to the Group as a whole and our assessment of the risk of misstatement at that 
component. In the current year, the range of performance materiality allocated to components was 30% to 100% (2017: 30% to 
100%) of total performance materiality or £192k to £641k (2017: £218k to £725k). 

Reporting threshold 
An amount below which identified misstatements are considered as being clearly trivial. 

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them all uncorrected audit differences in excess of £64k (2017: 
£73k), which is set at 5% of planning materiality, as well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting 
on qualitative grounds. 

We evaluate any uncorrected misstatements against both the quantitative measures of materiality discussed above and in light 
of other relevant qualitative considerations in forming our opinion. 

An overview of  the scope of  our audit 
Tailoring the scope 
Our assessment of audit risk, our evaluation of materiality and our allocation of performance materiality determines our audit 
scope for each component within the Group. Taken together, this enables us to form an opinion on the financial statements. We 
take into account size, risk profile, the organisation of the group, the effectiveness of group-wide controls and changes in the 
business environment when assessing the level of work to be performed at each component. 

After assessing the risk of material misstatement to the Group financial statements we ensured we had adequate quantitative 
coverage of significant accounts in the financial statements. Of the 35 reporting components of the Group, we selected 14 
components all within the UK, which represent the principal business units within the Group. 

We performed an audit of the complete financial information of all 14 components (“full scope components”) of which 9 were 
selected based on their size or risk characteristics and the remaining 5 components on the basis that these entities are required 
to file statutory accounts in accordance with the Companies Act 2006. 

The full scope components contributed 94% (2017: 92%) of the Underlying Profit before Tax, 92% (2017: 92%) of External 
Revenue and 97% (2017: 97%) of Total Net Assets. 

Of the remaining 20 components that together represent 6% of the Group’s Underlying Profit before Tax, none are individually 
greater than 2% of Underlying Profit before tax. For these components, we performed analytical review and testing of consolidation 
journals  and  intercompany  eliminations  to  respond  to  any  potential  risks  of  material  misstatement  to  the  Group  financial 
statements.

64

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

The charts below illustrate the coverage obtained from the work performed by our audit teams. 

Underlying Profit Before Tax

Profit Before Tax

94% Full scope
components

6% Review scope

94% Full scope
components

6% Review scope

Revenue

Total Net Assets

92% Full scope
components

8% Review scope

97% Full scope
components

3% Review scope

Changes from the prior year 
There were no changes in the approach and no significant changes in terms of coverage year on year. 

Involvement with component teams 
All audit work performed for the purposes of the audit was undertaken by the Group audit team. 

Our assessment of  the risks of  material misstatement 

Key audit matters 
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in our audit of the financial 
statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to 
fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation 
of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our 
audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in expressing our opinion thereon. We do not provide a separate opinion on 
these matters. 

65

                    
 
                    
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

                                                                                                                                                     Key observations  
                                                                                                                                                     communicated to the  

Risk                                                                       Our response to the risk                                   Audit Committee 

Our audit procedures indicate 
that the provision is consistent 
with  prior  years  and  that  it  is 
reasonable 
based 
assumptions 
the 
underlying exposures in the UK 
used car market. 

regarding 

on 

We consider the provision to be 
within an appropriate range.

Valuation of  inventory: Gross 
inventory – £393.7 million, (2017:  
£410.4 million); Inventory provision – 
£9.7 million, (2017: £9.2 million) 
The group has a significant value of new and 
used vehicle inventory. 

Vehicles  have  the  potential  to  experience 
significant  value  declines  in  short  time 
periods. 

Value  volatility  is  a  response  to  market 
conditions impacting demand and is deemed 
a higher risk in relation to used, demonstration 
and pre-reg vehicle inventory. 

The valuation of vehicle inventory is subject 
to significant judgement. Therefore, there is a 
risk that inventory is misstated. 

Refer  to  Accounting  policies  (page  81); 
judgements  and 
Significant  accounting 
estimates  (page  97)  and  Note  18  of   the 
Consolidated 
Statements 
Financial 
(page 113) 

We  understood  the  method  applied  by 
management  in  performing  its  inventory 
provisioning calculation and walked through 
the controls over the process. 

We  recalculated  management’s  provision 
and agreed all vehicle prices included through 
to  third  party  independent  market  values 
(CAP).  This  provides  a  base  value  for  all 
vehicles  at  the  year  end  date.  This  is 
compared to the current carrying value of the 
vehicles in order to calculate an estimated 
provision  figure  for  used  vehicles.  Higher 
provisions are made against demonstration 
and  pre-reg  vehicles  using  historic 
experience  adjusted  for  current  market 
conditions. 

We performed Analytical Review of the level 
of  provision  held  to  identify  any  significant 
provisions  on  a  particular  vehicle  type  or 
brand in the portfolio. A particular focus was 
given in this area to used, demonstration and 
pre-reg vehicles. 

We evaluated the accuracy of the provision 
in prior periods to assess management’s long 
term  forecasting  ability  and  compared  the 
post year end utilisation of the provision in the 
current year to the comparable period in the 
prior year. 

We  performed  full  scope  audit  procedures 
over this risk area in 14 full scope locations, 
which  covered  87.1%  of  the  risk  amount. 
Further, as the inventory provision is a single 
calculation  based  on  inventory  across  all 
the 
locations  our  procedures  covered 
inventory provision for all components.

66

     
    
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

                                                                                                                                                     Key observations  
                                                                                                                                                     communicated to the  

Risk                                                                       Our response to the risk                                   Audit Committee 

Assessment of  the carrying value of  
goodwill and other intangible assets: 
£112.2 million, (2017: £121.6 million) 
The group has a significant value of goodwill 
that has arisen from acquisitions as well as 
other intangible assets in the form of franchise 
agreements. 

Goodwill is allocated to cash generating units 
(‘CGUs’) grouped by manufacturer brand. 

A  number  of  brands  have  experienced 
challenging  trading  conditions  driving  poor 
financial  performance.  Management  have 
recorded an impairment charge of £9.3 million 
in the year in relation to BMW/Mini (£8.4m) 
and Nissan (£0.9m). 

There  is  a  risk  that  these  CGUs  may  not 
achieve the anticipated financial performance 
to support their carrying value, leading to an 
impairment  charge 
that  has  not  been 
recognised by management. 

We  understood  the  method  applied  by 
management  in  performing  its  impairment 
test  for  each  of  the  relevant  CGUs  and 
walked through the controls over the process. 

We have reviewed the rationale in respect of 
the allocation of goodwill to identified CGU’s. 

For  all  CGUs  we  calculated  the  degree  to 
which the key inputs and assumptions would 
need to change before an impairment was 
triggered or where the currently calculated 
impairment would be materially adjusted, and 
considered the likelihood of this occurring. We 
performed  our  own  sensitivities  on  the 
group’s  forecasts  and  determined  whether 
adequate headroom remained. 

For  CGUs  where  management  identified 
impairment, there was evidence of indicators 
of impairment or low levels of headroom exist 
we  performed  detailed  testing  to  critically 
assess and corroborate the key inputs to the 
valuations, including: 

We  are  satisfied  that  group 
goodwill and intangible assets 
have been correctly assessed 
for 
impairment,  based  on 
appropriate allocation to CGU’s 
and  the  impairment  charge  in 
the year is appropriate. 

Management  describes  these 
sensitivities appropriately in the 
goodwill and intangibles note to 
the group financial statements, 
in accordance with IAS 36.

is 

required 

judgement 

Significant 
in 
forecasting the future cash flows of each CGU 
due 
the 
the  current  conditions 
automotive market, together with the rate at 
which they are discounted. 

to 

in 

Refer  to  Accounting  policies  (page  79); 
Significant  accounting 
judgements  and 
estimates  (page  96)  and  Note  15  of   the 
Consolidated 
Statements 
Financial 
(page 108)

•

•

•

•

Analysing  the  historical  accuracy  of 
budgets to actual results to determine 
whether forecast cash flows are reliable 
based on past experience; 

Corroborating  the  discount  rate  by 
obtaining the underlying data used in the 
calculation and benchmarking it against 
market 
comparable 
organisations; and 

data 

and 

Validating the growth rates assumed by 
comparing them to either economic and 
industry 
detailed 
management action plans; and 

forecasts 

or 

Applying sensitivities to assumptions and 
recalculating headroom. 

the 

requirements  of 

We  assessed  the  disclosures  in  Note  15 
against 
IAS  36 
Impairment of Assets, in particular in respect 
of  the  requirement  to  disclose  further 
sensitivities  for  CGUs  where  a  reasonably 
possible change in a key assumption would 
cause an impairment. 

We  have  performed 
full  scope  audit 
procedures over this risk area in all relevant 
statutory locations, covering 100% of the risk 
amount.  We  have  performed  specified 
procedures  to  identify  any  indicators  of 
potential impairment of intangible assets, and 
determined  the  impact  of  these  indicators 
where such circumstances arose.

67

     
    
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

                                                                                                                                                     Key observations  
                                                                                                                                                     communicated to the  

Risk                                                                       Our response to the risk                                   Audit Committee 

Misstatement of  provisions and head 
office accruals: £33 million,  
(2017: £43.7 million) 

The nature of the group’s system architecture 
and  individual  site  accounting  functions 
results in the requirement for provisions and 
certain accruals to be maintained in entities 
accounted  for  by  the  head  office  function, 
primarily in relation to property and in respect 
of  the  participation  in  a  defined  benefit 
pension scheme. 

Management  has  to  apply  judgement  in 
assessing  provisions  and  demonstrate 
diligence in identifying required accruals held 
in respect of individual sites and for the group 
as  a  whole.  Given  this  judgement  and 
complicated system architecture, there is a 
risk that provisions and head office accruals 
are misstated. 

Refer to Accounting policies (page 85) and 
Note  24  of   the  Consolidated  Financial 
Statements (page 116)

We consider the provisions and 
head office accruals to be within 
an appropriate range. 

The  balance  in  respect  of 
property provisions has fallen in 
the year from £6.4m to £1m and 
pension liability of £5.6m was 
settled  post  year  end.  As  a 
result,  we  consider  the  level 
of  management 
judgement 
required relating to provisions is 
now lower than in prior years.

the 

We  understood  the  group’s  process  for 
and 
determining 
measurement  of  provisions  along  with 
management’s  controls  associated  to  the 
process. 

completeness 

We  assessed  the  level  of  provisions  and 
challenged  management’s  judgments  in 
relation to the recognition requirements of IAS 
37. We referred to pre and post year end third 
party evidence where appropriate to validate 
the existence and valuation of provisions and 
head office accruals. 

As  part  of  our  procedures  designed  to 
address the risk of management override of 
controls we reviewed journal postings related 
to  provisions  and  head  office  accruals  to 
identify  significant  releases  and  postings 
around the year end, which may be indicative 
of management override. 

Knowledge of the sector and the company’s 
operations was utilised to identify any new 
provisions that in our professional judgement 
would be considered unusual. 

We  have  performed 
full  scope  audit 
procedures over this risk area in all relevant 
statutory locations, which covered 100% of 
the risk amount.

68

     
    
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

                                                                                                                                                     Key observations  
                                                                                                                                                     communicated to the  

Risk                                                                       Our response to the risk                                   Audit Committee 

Based  on 
the  procedures 
performed,  including  those  in 
respect of manufacturer rebates 
and  bonuses,  we  are  satisfied 
that 
was 
appropriately  recognised  during 
the year.

revenue 

the 

Revenue recognition: £2,187 million, 
(2017: £2,269 million), including 
manufacturer’s rebates and bonuses: 
£122.9 million (2017: £121.2 million) 
The majority of the group’s sales arrangements 
are generally straightforward, being on a point 
of sale basis where vehicles are handed over to 
customers or servicing takes place at an agreed 
point  in  time,  requiring  little  judgement  to  be 
exercised. 

There is a natural pressure on the group to meet 
expectations and targets. Employee reward and 
incentive schemes based on achieving revenue 
targets may also create pressure to manipulate 
revenue transactions. 

to 

There is a risk that management may override 
controls 
intentionally  misstate  revenue 
transactions and bonuses within cost of sales. 
This  could  be  either  through  the  judgements 
made in estimating manufacturer rebates and 
bonuses  or  by  recording  fictitious  revenue 
transactions across the business. 

Refer  to  Accounting  policies  (page  85)  and 
Note 5 of  the Consolidated Financial Statements 
(page 98)

the  business’s 

We  understood 
revenue 
recognition  policy  and  how  this  was  applied 
including  the  relevant  controls  operating  in 
respect of the recognition of revenue and the 
allocation of manufacturer bonuses and rebates. 
As part of our overall revenue recognition testing 
we  used  data  analysis  tools  on  £2.16  billion 
(98.7%) of revenue from continuing operations 
in the year to test the correlation of revenue to 
cash receipts to verify the occurrence of revenue. 

We  reviewed  revenue  by  dealership  and 
considered margins in comparison to prior year 
and  similar  dealerships  in  order  to  identify 
unusual  changes  in  performance,  material 
increases in revenue recognised or increased 
margins which may indicate an overstatement 
of manufacturer rebates or bonuses. 

We  performed  cut-off  testing  for  a  sample  of 
revenue  transactions  around  the  period  end 
date, to check that they were recognised in the 
appropriate period. 

Other audit procedures designed to address the 
risk  of  management  override  of  controls 
included journal entry testing, applying particular 
focus  to  the  manual  entries  associated  to 
revenue accounts. 

We  discussed  key  contractual  arrangements 
with  management  and  obtained  relevant 
documentation, 
respect  of 
including 
manufacturer rebate and bonus arrangements 
to ensure the accuracy of accrued rebates and 
bonuses at the year end. 

in 

Where  rebate  arrangements  existed  we 
reviewed  contracts,  recalculated  rebates  and 
agreed values to post year end credit notes and 
cash  receipts.  We  performed  analysis  over 
changes  to  prior  period  rebate  estimates  to 
challenge  assumptions  made, 
including 
assessing  estimates 
for  evidence  of 
management bias. 

We reviewed management’s assessment of the 
impact  of  IFRS  15  on  revenue  recognition, 
including  the  recognition  criteria  under  the 
five-step model. 

In addition, we assessed the disclosures against 
the requirements of IFRS 15 and benchmarked 
against disclosures issued by competitors. 

We performed full scope audit procedures over 
revenue for the 92% of revenue within full scope 
components and our review procedures obtained 
a further 8% coverage over revenue recognised 
in relation to review scope components.

There have been no changes to key audit matters in the current year.

69

     
    
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Our opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit: 

•

•

the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial period for which the financial statements 
are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and 

the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements. 

Matters on which we are required to report by exception 

ISAs (UK and 
Ireland) reporting

We are required to report to you if we identify material misstatements in the Strategic 
Report or Directors’ Report in light of the knowledge and understanding of the group 
and parent company and its environment obtained in the course of the audit. 

no 
have 
We 
exceptions to report.

Companies Act 
2006 reporting

We are required to report to you if, in our opinion: 

•

•

•

•

adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or 
returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited 
by us; or 

the  parent  company  financial  statements  are  not  in  agreement  with  the 
accounting records and returns; or 

certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 

we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our 
audit. 

We 
no 
have 
exceptions to report.

Other Information 
The other information comprises the information included in the annual report set out on pages 4 to 61, other than the financial 
statements and our auditor’s report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information. 

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated 
in this report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider 
whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit or 
otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we 
are required to determine whether there is a material misstatement in the financial statements or a material misstatement of the 
other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of the other 
information, we are required to report that fact. 

We have nothing to report in this regard. 

Responsibilities of  directors 
As explained more fully in the statement of directors’ responsibilities set out on page 61, the directors are responsible for the 
preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as 
the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error. 

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group and parent company’s ability to continue 
as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting 
unless the directors either intend to liquidate the group or the parent company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative 
but to do so. 

70

     
 
     
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of  the financial statements 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is 
a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a 
material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or 
in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these 
financial statements. 

This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 
2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those matters we are required to 
state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume 
responsibility to anyone other than the company and the company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for 
the opinions we have formed. 

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the Financial Reporting Council’s 
website at https://www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report. 

Nigel Meredith (Senior statutory auditor) 
for and on behalf of Ernst & Young LLP, Statutory Auditor 
Birmingham 
12 March 2019 

Notes: 

1. 

The maintenance and integrity of  the Marshall Motor Holdings PLC web site is the responsibility of  the directors; the work carried out by the auditors does 
not involve consideration of  these matters and, accordingly, the auditor accept no responsibility for any changes that may have occurred to the financial statements 
since they were initially presented on the web site. 

2. 

Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of  financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

71

 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Consolidated Statement of  Comprehensive Income 
For the year ended 31 December 2018 

                                                                                                Non-                                                        
                                                         Underlying          underlying                                     Underlying
                                                                   items                   items                    Total                   items
                                                                    2018                    2018                    2018                    2017
                                               Note             £'000                   £'000                   £'000                   £'000

            Total     
             2018     

£'000

Non- 
underlying 
items
2017
£'000

Total 
Total
2017 
2017
£'000
£'000 

Continuing operations 

Revenue                                5    2,186,887                        -         2,186,887         2,231,979 

  2,186,887    

Cost of sales                              (1,931,210)                       -        (1,931,210)       (1,973,678)

 (1,931,210)    

Gross profit                                   255,677                        -            255,677            258,301 

     255,677    

-

-

-

 2,231,979  
 2,231,979 

(1,973,678)
(1,973,678) 

 258,301 
 258,301  

Net operating expenses                (223,648)              (6,963)          (230,611)          (225,421)

    (230,611)    

Operating profit                              32,029               (6,963)             25,066              32,880 

       25,066    

 (12,783)

 (12,783)

 (238,204)
 (238,204) 

 20,097 
 20,097  

Net finance costs                 11         (6,362)                       -               (6,362)              (7,519)

        (6,362)    

-

Profit before taxation           6         25,667               (6,963)             18,704              25,361 

       18,704    

 (12,783)

 (7,519)
 (7,519) 

 12,578 
 12,578  

Taxation                               12         (4,395)                 (380)              (4,775)              (4,554)

        (4,775)    

 1,474 

 (3,080)
 (3,080) 

Profit from continuing  
operations after tax                        21,272               (7,343)             13,929              20,807 

       13,929    

 (11,309)

 9,498 
 9,498  

Discontinued operations 

Profit from discontinued 
operations after tax                8                  -                   589                   589                2,990

            589    

Profit for the year                           21,272               (6,754)             14,518              23,797 

       14,518    

 36,851 

 25,542 

39,841
39,841 

 49,339 
 49,339  

Attributable to: 

Owners of the parent                        21,272               (6,754)             14,518              23,818 

       14,518    

 25,542 

 49,360 
 49,360  

Non-controlling interests                            -                        -                        -                    (21)

                 -     

-

(21)
(21) 

                                                        21,272               (6,754)             14,518              23,797 

       14,518    

 25,542 

 49,339 
 49,339  

Total comprehensive  
income for  
the year net of  tax                          21,272               (6,754)             14,518              23,797 

       14,518    

 25,542 

 49,339 
 49,339  

Attributable to: 

Owners of the parent                        21,272               (6,754)             14,518              23,818 

       14,518    

 25,542 

 49,360 
 49,360  

Non-controlling interests                            -                        -                        -                    (21)

                 -     

-

(21)
(21) 

                                                        21,272               (6,754)             14,518              23,797 

       14,518    

 25,542 

 49,339 
 49,339  

Earnings per share (EPS)  
attributable to equity  
shareholders of  the parent 

From continuing operations: 
Basic                                    13             27.4                        -                  17.9                  26.9

           17.9   

Diluted                                 13             26.5                        -                  17.3                  26.0

           17.3    

From continuing and  
discontinued operations: 

Basic                                    13             27.4                        -                  18.7                  30.8

           18.7    

Diluted                                 13             26.5                        -                  18.1                  29.8

           18.1    

-

-

-

-

 12.3  
 12.3 

 11.9  
 11.9

 63.8
 63.8  

 61.7 
 61.7

72

                          
                         
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Consolidated Balance Sheet 
At 31 December 2018 

Note

2018
£’000

2017 
£’000 

Assets 

Non-current assets 

Goodwill and other intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Investment property

Deferred tax asset

Total non-current assets

Current assets 

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Assets classified as held for sale

Total current assets

Total assets

Non-current liabilities 

Loans and borrowings

Trade and other payables

Provisions

Deferred tax liabilities

Total non-current liabilities

Current liabilities 

Loans and borrowings

Trade and other payables

Provisions

Current tax liabilities

Total current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Shareholders’ equity 

Share capital

Share premium

Share-based payments reserve

Own shares reserve

Retained earnings

Equity attributable to owners of  the parent

Share of equity attributable to non-controlling interests

Total equity 

15

16

17

25

18

19

20

21

23

22

24

25

23

22

24

28

28

28

28

112,202

155,758

2,590

- 

121,596 

142,428 

2,590 

39 

270,550

266,653 

384,005

79,682

1,174

797

465,658

736,208

5,665

5,596

- 

20,787

32,048

401,260 

92,141 

4,867 

750 

499,018 

765,671 

6,466 

4,281 

4,015 

20,448 

35,210 

641

642 

493,859

527,614 

7,926

1,346

503,772

535,820

200,388

49,834

19,672

1,570

- 

129,312

200,388

- 

8,815 

2,180 

539,251 

574,461 

191,210 

49,531 

19,672 

2,608 

-  

119,399 

191,210 

-  

200,388

191,210 

The consolidated financial statements of Marshall Motor Holdings plc were approved for issue by the Board of Directors on 
12 March 2019. 

Daksh Gupta
Chief Executive Officer

Richard Blumberger 
Chief Financial Officer 

73

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Consolidated Statement of  Changes in Equity 
For the year ended 31 December 2018 

                                                                                                                                                                  Equity 
                                                                                                 Share-                                              attributable
                                                                                                  based             Own                            to owners
Non- 
                                                        Share          Share     payments         shares       Retained            of  the controlling
interests
                                                       capital     premium         reserve       reserve       earnings            parent
£'000
                                         Note         £'000           £'000             £'000           £'000              £'000              £'000

Total 
equity 
£'000 

Balance at  
1 January 2017                       49,531       19,672           1,869                 -         74,566       145,638

Profit for the year                               -                 -                  -                 -         49,360         49,360

Total comprehensive  
income                                              -                 -                  -                 -         49,360         49,360

21

(21)

145,659 

49,339 

(21)

49,339 

Transactions with  
owners 

Dividends paid              14                 -                 -                  -                 -          (4,527)         (4,527)

Share-based  
payments charge          29                 -                 -              739                 -                   -              739

Balance at  
31 December 2017                 49,531       19,672           2,608                 -       119,399       191,210

Change in accounting  
policy                              3                 -                 -                  -                 -               (76)              (76)

Restated balance at  
1 January 2018                       49,531       19,672           2,608                 -       119,323       191,134

Profit for the year                               -                 -                  -                 -         14,518         14,518

Total comprehensive 
income                                              -                 -                  -                 -         14,518         14,518

Transactions with  
owners 

Dividends paid              14                 -                 -                  -                 -          (4,983)         (4,983)

Issue of share  
capital                           28            303                 -                  -           (303)                  -                   -

Exercise of share  
options                          29                 -                 -         (1,567)           303              504             (760)

Share-based  
payments charge          29                 -                 -              529                 -                   -              529

Acquisition of non- 
controlling interest 
in subsidiaries               33                 -                 -                  -                 -               (50)              (50)

Balance at  
31 December 2018                 49,834       19,672           1,570                 -       129,312       200,388

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(4,527) 

739 

191,210 

(76) 

191,134 

14,518 

14,518 

(4,983) 

- 

(760) 

529 

(50) 

200,388 

74

 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement 
For the year ended 31 December 2018 

Operating profit 

– continuing operations

– discontinued operations

Adjustments for: 

Depreciation and amortisation

Share-based payments charge

Profit on disposal of assets classified as held for sale

Loss on disposal of property plant and equipment

Loss on impairment of goodwill and other intangible assets

Loss on impairment of property, plant and equipment

Loss on disposal of investment property

Impairment of investment

Profit on disposal of subsidiary

Cash flows from operating activities

Decrease/(increase) in inventories

Decrease in trade and other receivables

(Decrease)/increase in trade and other payables

(Decrease)/increase in provisions

Total cash flows generated by operations

Tax paid

Interest paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Investing activities 

Purchase of property, plant, equipment,  
leased vehicles and software

Net purchase of investment property

Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired

Acquisition of non-controlling interest in subsidiaries

Note

8

15/16

29

7

6

15

16

6

8

24

11

15/16

Net cash flow from sale of discontinued operation

8

Proceeds from disposal of property, plant  
and equipment and leased vehicles

Proceeds from disposal of assets classified as held for sale

Net cash outflow from investing activities

Financing activities 

Proceeds from borrowings

Repayment of borrowings

Dividends paid

Settlement of exercised share awards

Net cash outflow from financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January

Cash and cash equivalents at year end

14

20

75

2018
£’000

25,066

589

9,327

732

(268)

67

9,302

87

1,146

- 

(589)

45,459

17,255

12,383

(33,699)

(4,904)

36,494

(5,231)

(6,362)

24,901

(22,526)

(1,146)

- 

(50)

589

274

1,018

(21,841)

30,000

(30,802)

(4,983)

(968)

(6,753)

(3,693)

4,867

1,174

2017 
£’000 

20,097 

41,137 

25,183 

739 

-  

1,085 

-  

945 

-  

10 

(38,664) 

50,532 

(21,223) 

450 

33,703 

6,138 

69,600 

(7,443) 

(8,099) 

54,058 

(57,549) 

-  

(77) 

-  

44,695 

11,985 

-  

(946) 

41,778 

(85,579) 

(4,527) 

-  

(48,328) 

4,784 

83 

4,867 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Net Debt Reconciliation 
For the year ended 31 December 2018 

Reconciliation of  cash flow to movement in net debt 

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Proceeds from drawdown of RCF

Repayment of drawdown of RCF

Proceeds of asset backed borrowings (Discontinued)

Repayment of asset backed borrowings (Discontinued)

Repayment of other borrowings

Repayment of bank overdraft

Repayment of debt with acquisitions

Repayment of derivatives with acquisitions

(Increase)/decrease in net debt

Opening net debt

Net debt at year end

Net debt at year end consists of: 

Cash and cash equivalents

Loans and borrowings

Closing net debt

Note

23

23

23

23

20

23

2018
£'000

2017 
£'000 

(3,693)

(30,000)

30,000

- 

- 

802

- 

- 

- 

(2,891)

(2,241)

(5,132)

1,174

(6,306)

(5,132)

4,784 

(10,000) 

45,000 

(31,778) 

68,185 

2,791 

10,825 

25,705 

1,258 

116,770 

(119,011) 

(2,241) 

4,867 

(7,108) 

(2,241)

76

 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

1. Presentation of  the financial statements 

General information 

Marshall Motor Holdings plc (the Company) is incorporated and resident in the United Kingdom. The Company is a public limited 
company, limited by shares, whose shares are listed on the Alternative Investment Market (AIM) of the London Stock Exchange. 
The Company is registered in England and Wales under the Companies Act 2006 (registration number 02051461) with the 
address of the registered office being; Airport House, The Airport, Cambridge, CB5 8RY, United Kingdom.  

The financial statements of Marshall Motor Holdings plc were authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 12 March 2019.  

Basis of  preparation 

The consolidated financial statements of the Company are prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRS) as adopted by the European Union and in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 
applicable to entities reporting under IFRS.  

The consolidated financial statements include the results of the Company and its subsidiaries (together “the Group”); a schedule 
of all subsidiaries is contained in Note 6 ‘Investments in Subsidiaries’ of the Company financial statements (page 139). The 
consolidated financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention as modified by the revaluation of 
investment properties and assets held for sale.  

During the year the Group has adopted the amendments to IAS 40 Investment Properties, the amendments to IFRS 2 Share 
Based Payment Transactions as well as the following new standards IFRS 9 Financial Instruments and IFRS 15 Revenue from 
Contracts with Customers. Full details of the impact of adoption are set out in Note 3 ‘Changes in Accounting Policies and 
Disclosures’. 

The consolidated financial statements are prepared in Sterling which is both the functional currency of the Group’s subsidiaries 
and presentational currency of the Group. All values are rounded to the nearest thousand pounds (£’000) except where otherwise 
indicated. 

Going concern 

The consolidated financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis. After making appropriate enquiries, the Directors 
have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable 
future and for at least one year from the date that these consolidated financial statements are signed. For these reasons they 
continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the consolidated financial statements.  

The  Directors  have  considered  the  future  prospects  and  performance  of  the  Group  including:  business  plans,  impact  of 
acquisitions, future cash flows and availability of core and auxiliary financing facilities. 

2. Accounting policies 

Basis of  consolidation 

Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Company. Control is achieved when the Group is exposed, or has rights, to variable 
returns from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee. 
Specifically, the Group controls an investee if, and only if, the Group has: a) power over the investee (i.e., existing rights that give 
it the current ability to direct the relevant activities of the investee); b) exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement 
with the investee; and c) the ability to use its power over the investee to affect its returns. 

In assessing control potential voting rights that presently are exercisable or convertible are taken into account. Generally, there 
is a presumption that a majority of voting rights results in control. The Group re-assesses whether or not it controls an investee 
if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more of the elements of control detailed above. 

77

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2. Accounting policies (continued) 

Basis of  consolidation (continued) 

The financial information of subsidiaries is included in the consolidated financial information from the date that control commences 
until the date that control ceases. Assets, liabilities, income and expenses of a subsidiary acquired or disposed of during the year 
are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date the Group gains control until the date the Group ceases to 
control the subsidiary. 

When the Group losses control over a subsidiary, it derecognises the related assets (including goodwill), liabilities, non-controlling 
interest and other components of equity, while any resultant gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss. Any investment retained 
is recognised at fair value. 

Transactions eliminated on consolidation 

Intragroup balances and any gains and losses or income and expenses arising from intragroup transactions, are eliminated in 
preparing the consolidated financial information. Losses are eliminated in the same way as gains but only to the extent that there 
is no evidence of impairment. 

Subsidiary audit exemption 

The consolidated financial statements include the results of all subsidiary undertakings owned by the Company as listed in Note 6 
‘Investments in Subsidiaries’ on page 139 of the Annual Report. 

Certain of the Group’s subsidiaries, listed below, have taken the exemption from an audit for the year ended 31 December 2018 
by virtue of s479A of the Companies Act 2006. In order to allow these subsidiaries to take the audit exemption, the parent company, 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc, has given a statutory guarantee of all the outstanding liabilities as at 31 December 2018 of the 
subsidiaries listed below.  

The subsidiaries which have taken an exemption from audit for the year ended 31 December 2018 by virtue of s479A of the 
Companies Act 2006 are: 

Tim Brinton Cars Limited (reg no. 01041301)                         S.G. Smith (Motors) Limited (reg no. 00287379) 
Marshall of Scunthorpe Limited (reg no. 01174004)              S.G. Smith (Motors) Beckenham Limited (reg no. 00648395) 
CMG 2007 Limited (reg no. 06275636)                                  S.G. Smith (Motors) Forest Hill Limited (reg no. 00581710) 
S.G. Smith Automotive Limited (reg no. 00622112)               S.G. Smith (Motors) Crown Point Limited (reg no. 00581711) 
Exeter Trade Parts Specialists LLP (reg no. OC329331)      S.G. Smith (Motors) Sydenham Limited (reg no. 00660066) 
Astle Limited (reg no. 01114983)                                             Prep-Point Limited (reg no. 00660067) 
Crystal Motor Group Limited (reg no. 04813767)                   S.G. Smith Trade Parts Limited (reg no. 01794317) 

Business combinations 

The Group applies the acquisition method to account for business combinations. The consideration transferred for the acquisition 
of a subsidiary is the fair value of the assets transferred, the liabilities incurred to the former owners of the acquiree and the equity 
interests issued by the Group. The consideration transferred includes the fair value of any asset or liability resulting from a 
contingent consideration arrangement.  

Any contingent consideration to be transferred by the Group is recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. Subsequent 
changes to the fair value of the contingent consideration that is deemed to be an asset or liability is recognised in accordance 
with IFRS 9 Financial Instruments in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income. Contingent consideration that is 
classified as equity is not re-measured and its subsequent settlement is accounted for within equity. 

Acquisition related costs are expensed as incurred and are excluded from underlying profit before tax. 

On the acquisition of a business, fair values are attributed to the identifiable assets and liabilities and contingent liabilities unless 
the fair value cannot be reliably measured, in which case the value is subsumed into goodwill. Identifiable assets acquired and 
liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination that meet the recognition criteria under IFRS 3 Business 
Combinations are measured initially at their fair values at the acquisition date.  

78

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Business combinations (continued) 

Non-controlling interests 

The Group recognises any non-controlling interest in the acquiree on an acquisition by acquisition basis, either at fair value or at 
the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the recognised amounts of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets. 

Measurement period adjustments 

The Group assesses the fair value of assets acquired and finalises purchase price allocation within the measurement period 
following acquisition and in accordance with IFRS 3 Business Combinations. This includes an exercise to evaluate other material 
separately identifiable intangible assets such as franchise agreements, favourable leases and order backlog. 

The finalisation of purchase price allocations may result in a change in the fair value of assets acquired. In accordance with IFRS 
3 Business Combinations measurement period adjustments are reflected in the financial statements as if the final purchase 
price allocation had been completed at the acquisition date. 

Goodwill 

Goodwill arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries and represents the excess of; the consideration transferred, the amount of any 
non-controlling interest in the acquiree and the acquisition date fair value of any previous equity interest in the acquiree over the 
fair value of the identifiable net assets acquired. 

Where the fair value of the consideration received is less than the fair value of the acquired net assets, the deficit is recognised 
immediately in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income as a bargain purchase. Goodwill is capitalised and subject 
to an impairment review at least annually and is carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. Impairment losses on 
goodwill are not reversed in subsequent periods. 

Intangible assets 

Intangible  assets,  when  acquired  separately  from  a  business  combination,  include  computer  software  and  licences.  Cost 
comprises purchase price from third parties and amortisation is calculated on a straight line basis over the assets’ expected 
economic lives, which varies depending on the nature of the asset. Licenses are amortised over the length of the licence and 
software is amortised between 3-5 years. 

Intangible assets acquired as part of a business combination include franchise agreements, favourable leases and order backlog. 
These items are capitalised separately from goodwill if the asset is separable or if the benefit of the intangible asset is obtained 
through contractual or other legal rights and if its fair value can be measured reliably on initial recognition. Such assets are stated 
at fair value less accumulated amortisation.  

Amortisation is charged on a straight-line basis over the following periods: 

Favourable leases - 3 years 

•
• Order backlog - as the orders are fulfilled 
•

Franchise agreements - indefinite life, not amortised.  

Intangible assets with an indefinite useful economic life are tested annually for impairment. Amortisation is included within net 
operating expenses in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income. 

Property, plant and equipment 

Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and less any recognised impairment 
loss. Cost includes the original purchase price of the asset and the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition 
for its intended use. When parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives those components are 
accounted for as separate items of property, plant and equipment. Subsequent costs are included in the asset’s carrying amount 
or recognised as a separate asset, as appropriate, only when it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the 
item will flow to the Group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. 

79

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Property, plant and equipment (continued) 

Depreciation is charged to write assets down to their residual values over their estimated useful economic lives. Depreciation is 
charged on a straight-line basis over the following periods: 

•
•
•
•
•
•

Leasehold improvements – shorter of the lease term or 10 years 
Fixtures and fittings – 5 years 
Computer equipment – 2-5 years 
Freehold and long-leasehold buildings – 50 years 
Land – indefinite life, not depreciated  
Assets under construction – not depreciated. 

The residual values and useful economic lives of assets are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date. 
The gains and losses on disposal of assets are determined by comparing sales proceeds with the carrying amount of the asset 
and are recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income. 

Investment property 
Initial recognition 

Investment properties are measured initially at cost, including transaction costs. 

Subsequent measurement 

Land and buildings are shown at fair value based on formal valuations by external, independent valuers performed at least every 
three years and updated each year for the Directors’ estimate of value. Valuations are performed with sufficient regularity to 
ensure that the fair value of a revalued asset does not differ materially from its carrying amount. Investment property is not 
depreciated. Any surplus or deficit on revaluation is taken to the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income and is not 
included within underlying profit before tax. 

Derecognition 

Investment properties are derecognised either when they have been disposed of (i.e., at the date the recipient obtains control) 
or when they are permanently withdrawn from use and no future economic benefit is expected from their disposal. The difference 
between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset is recognised in the Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income in the period of derecognition. The amount of consideration to be included in the gain or loss arising 
from the derecognition of investment property is determined in accordance with the requirements for determining the transaction 
price under IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers. 

Impairment of  non-financial assets 

Assets not subject to amortisation are tested annually for impairment, or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances 
indicate a potential impairment. Assets that are subject to amortisation are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes 
in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by 
which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value 
less costs to sell and value in use. For the purposes of assessing impairment assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which 
there are separately identifiable cash flows (cash generating units). Non-financial assets other than goodwill that suffered 
impairment are reviewed for possible reversal of the impairment at each reporting date. 

Goodwill and franchise agreements acquired in a business combination are allocated to each of the cash generating units. For 
the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated to each of the cash generating units 
(“CGUs”), or groups of CGUs, that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination. The group of CGUs to which 
the goodwill and franchise agreements are allocated (being groups of dealerships connected by manufacturer brand) represents 
the lowest level within the entity at which the goodwill and franchise agreements are monitored for internal management purposes. 

80

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Inventories  

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Costs incurred in bringing each product to its present location 
and condition are included and cost is based on price including delivery costs less specific trade discounts. Net realisable value 
is based on estimated selling price less further costs to be incurred to disposal. Provision is made for obsolete, slow-moving or 
defective items where appropriate. 

Inventories held on consignment are recognised in the Consolidated Balance Sheet with a corresponding liability when the terms 
of a consignment agreement and industry practice indicate that the principal benefit of owning the inventory (the ability to sell it) 
and principal risks of ownership (stock financing charges, responsibility for safekeeping and some risk of obsolescence) rest with 
the Group. Stock financing charges from manufacturers and other vehicle funding facilities are presented within finance costs. 
These charges are expensed over this period that vehicles are funded. 

The Group finances the purchase of new and used vehicle inventories using vehicle funding facilities provided by various lenders 
including the captive finance companies associated with brand partners. These finance arrangements generally have a maturity 
of 90 days or less and the Group is normally required to repay amounts outstanding on the earlier of the sale of the vehicles that 
have been funded under the facilities or the stated maturity date. Amounts due to finance companies in respect of vehicle funding 
are included within trade payables and disclosed under vehicle financing arrangements. Related cash flows are reported within 
cash flows from operating activities within the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows. Vehicle financing facilities are subject to 
LIBOR-based (or similar) interest rates. The interest incurred under these arrangements is included within finance costs and 
classified as stock holding interest. 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at bank and cash in hand.  

Assets held for sale 

Non-current assets are classified as held for sale if their carrying amount will be recovered principally through a sale transaction 
rather than through continuing use. This classification is used where a sale is considered highly probable. Assets held for sale 
are measured at the lower of their carrying amount and their fair value less costs to sell. 

An impairment loss is recognised for any initial or subsequent write-down of the asset to fair value less costs to sell. Any 
subsequent increase in the fair value less costs to sell of an asset is recognised where it is not in excess of any cumulative 
impairment loss which has been previously recognised. Non-current assets are not depreciated while they are classified as held 
for sale. 

Assets  classified  as  held  for  sale  are  presented  separately  from  other  asset  classes  in  the  current  assets  section  of  the 
Consolidated Balance Sheet.  

Financial instruments 
Financial assets 
Recognition and initial measurement 

Trade receivables are initially recognised when they originated. Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for goods 
sold or for services performed by the Group in the ordinary course of business. Credit terms are less than one year, as such they 
are recognised as current assets.  

All other financial assets are initially recognised when the Group becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. 

On initial recognition, a financial asset (unless it is a trade receivable without a significant financing component) is initially measured 
at fair value plus, for a financial asset not at fair value reported in profit or loss, transaction costs that are directly attributable to 
its acquisition or issue. A trade receivable without a significant financing component is initially measured at the transaction price. 

81

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Financial instruments (continued) 

Financial assets (continued) 

Classification and subsequent measurement 

A financial asset is classified either as being; measured subsequently at fair value (either through other comprehensive income 
or through profit or loss), or measured at amortised cost. The classification depends on the Group’s business model for managing 
the financial assets and the contractual terms of the cash flows. 

All financial assets of the Group are classified as measured at amortised cost. 

Financial assets are not reclassified subsequent to their initial recognition unless the Group changes its business model for 
managing financial assets in which case all affected financial assets are reclassified on the first day of the first reporting period 
following the change in the business model. 

A financial asset is measured at amortised cost if it meets both of the following conditions and is not designated as at fair value 
reported in profit or loss: 

•
•

it is held within a business model whose objective is to hold assets to collect contractual cash flows; and 
its contractual terms give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are solely payments of principal and interest on the 
principal amount outstanding. 

Financial assets at amortised cost are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. The 
amortised cost is reduced by impairment losses. Interest income, foreign exchange gains and losses and impairments are 
recognised in profit or loss. Any gain or loss on de-recognition is recognised in profit or loss. 

Derecognition 

The Group derecognises a financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire, or it 
transfers the rights to receive the contractual cash flows in a transaction in which substantially all of the risks and rewards of 
ownership of the financial asset are transferred or in which the Group neither transfers nor retains substantially all of the risks 
and rewards of ownership and it does not retain control of the financial asset. 

Impairment of  financial assets 

The Group recognises loss allowances for expected credit losses (ECL) on financial assets measured at amortised cost. Loss 
allowances for trade receivables are always measured at an amount equal to lifetime ECL. ECL are a probability-weighted 
estimate of credit losses. Credit losses are measured as the present value of all cash shortfalls (i.e. the difference between the 
cash flows due to the Group in accordance with the contract and the cash flows that the Group expects to receive). An assessment 
of the ECL is calculated using a provision matrix model to estimate the loss rates to be applied to each trade receivable category. 
ECL are discounted at the effective interest rate of the financial asset. Loss allowances for financial assets measured at amortised 
cost are deducted from the gross carrying amount of the assets. 

At each reporting date, the Group assesses whether financial assets carried at amortised cost are credit-impaired. A financial 
asset is ‘credit-impaired’ when one or more events that have a detrimental impact on the estimated future cash flows of the 
financial asset have occurred. 

The gross carrying amount of a financial asset is written off (either partially or in full) to the extent that there is no realistic prospect 
of recovery. This is generally the case when the Group determines that the debtor does not have assets or sources of income 
that could generate sufficient cash flows to repay the amounts subject to the write-off. However, financial assets that are written 
off could still be subject to enforcement activities in order to comply with the Group’s procedures for recovery of amounts due. 

Financial liabilities 

The Group classifies its financial liabilities as measured at amortised cost. The classification of financial instruments is determined 
at initial recognition in accordance with the substance of the contractual arrangement into which the Group has entered. 

82

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Financial liabilities (continued) 

Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost include non-derivative financial liabilities which are held at original cost, less 
amortisation. Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost comprise mainly trade and other payables and borrowings (see 
below for the separate accounting policies for each specific financial liability). 

Offsetting financial instruments 

Financial assets and financial liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the Consolidated Balance Sheet when, and 
only when, the Group currently has a legally enforceable right to set off the amounts and it intends either to settle them on a net 
basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. 

Comparative  period  financial  instruments  accounting  policy  under  IAS  39  Financial  Instruments: 
Recognition and Measurement. 

The Group classifies its financial assets as loans and receivables and has financial liabilities measure at amortised cost. The 
classification of financial instruments is determined at initial recognition in accordance with the substance of the contractual 
arrangement into which the Group has entered. 

Loans and receivables 

Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that arise principally through the 
provision of services to customers. They are initially recognised at fair value and are subsequently stated at amortised cost using 
the effective interest method. They are included in current assets except for maturities greater than 12 months after the end of 
the reporting period. Loans and receivables comprise mainly cash and cash equivalents and trade and other receivables (see 
above for the separate accounting policies for each specific financial asset). 

Impairment of  financial assets 

Impairment of financial assets are recognised when there is objective evidence (such as significant financial difficulties on the 
part of the counterparty, or default or significant delay in payment) that the Group will be unable to collect all of the amounts due 
under the terms receivable. The amount of such a provision is the difference between the net carrying amount and the present 
value of the future expected cash flows associated with the impaired financial asset. 

Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost 

Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost include non-derivative financial liabilities which are held at original cost, less 
amortisation. Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost comprise mainly trade and other payables and borrowings (see 
below for the separate accounting policies for each specific financial liability). 

Fair value measurement 

The Group measures non-financial assets such as investment properties, at fair value at each balance sheet date. Fair value is 
the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants 
at the measurement date. The fair value measurement is based on the presumption that the transaction to sell the asset or 
transfer the liability takes place either in the principal market for the asset or liability, or in the absence of a principal market, in 
the most advantageous market for the asset or liability. The principal or the most advantageous market must be accessible by 
the Group. 

The fair value of an asset or a liability is measured using the assumptions that market participants would use when pricing the 
asset or liability, assuming that market participants act in their economic best interest. A fair value measurement of a non-financial 
asset takes into account a market participant’s ability to generate economic benefits by using the asset in its highest and best 
use or by selling it to another market participant that would use the asset in its highest and best use. 

83

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Fair value measurement (continued) 

The Group uses valuation techniques that are appropriate in the circumstances and for which sufficient data are available to 
measure fair value, maximising the use of relevant observable inputs and minimising the use of unobservable inputs. All assets 
and liabilities for which fair value is measured or disclosed in the financial statements are categorised within the fair value hierarchy, 
described as follows, based on the lowest level input that is significant to the fair value measurement as a whole: 

•
• 

• 

Level 1 – Quoted (unadjusted) market prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities 
Level 2 – Valuation techniques for which the lowest level input that is significant to the fair value measurement is directly or 
indirectly observable 
Level 3 – Valuation techniques for which the lowest level input that is significant to the fair value measurement is unobservable 

For assets and liabilities that are recognised in the financial statements at fair value on a recurring basis, the Group determines 
whether transfers have occurred between levels in the hierarchy by re-assessing categorisation (based on the lowest level input 
that is significant to the fair value measurement as a whole) at the end of each reporting period.  

External valuers are involved for valuation of investment properties and assets held for sale. At each reporting date, the Directors 
consider movements in the values of assets and liabilities which are required to be remeasured or re-assessed as per the Group’s 
accounting policies. For this analysis, the Directors consider the major inputs applied in the latest valuation by reviewing the 
information in the valuation computation to valuation reports and other relevant documents. 

The Directors, in conjunction with the Group’s external valuers, also compare the change in the fair value of each asset and 
liability with relevant external sources to determine whether the change is reasonable.  

For the purpose of fair value disclosures, the Group has determined classes of assets and liabilities on the basis of the nature, 
characteristics and risks of the asset or liability and the level of the fair value hierarchy, as explained above.  

Fair-value related disclosures for financial instruments and non-financial assets that are measured at fair value or where fair 
values are disclosed, are summarised in Note 27 ‘Fair Value Measurement’. 

Share capital 

Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares are shown in share 
premium as a deduction from the proceeds. 

Dividend distribution 

Final dividends to the Group’s shareholders are recognised as a liability in the Group’s financial statements in the period in which 
the dividends are approved by the Group’s shareholders. Interim dividends are recognised when they are paid. 

Trade and other payables 

Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the ordinary course of business. These 
are classified as current liabilities if payment is due in one year or less. If payment is due at a later date they are presented as 
non-current liabilities. 

Trade payables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest 
rate method. 

Trade payables include the liability for vehicles held on consignment with the corresponding asset included within inventories. 

84

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Borrowings 

Borrowings comprise asset backed finance, mortgages and bank borrowings; they are recognised initially at fair value, net of 
transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently carried at amortised cost. Any difference between the proceeds (net of 
transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income over the 
period of the borrowings using the effective interest method. 

Bank overdrafts, which form an integral part of the Group’s cash management, are included as a component of loans and 
borrowings for the purpose of presentation in the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows. Bank overdrafts are presented within 
borrowings in current liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheet. 

Provisions 

A provision is recognised in the Consolidated Balance Sheet when the Group has; a present legal or constructive obligation as 
a result of a past event, it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation and a reliable 
estimate can be made of the obligation. If the effect is material provisions are determined by discounting the expected future 
cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and, when appropriate, the risks 
specific to the liability. The increase in the provision due to the passage of time is recognised in finance costs. 

Dilapidation provision 

The Group operates from a number of leasehold premises and is typically required by the terms of the lease to restore leased 
premises to their original condition on vacation of the premises at the end of the lease term. Estimates of dilapidation costs are 
calculated in accordance with the specific remediation requirements stipulated in each lease contract. At the point at which these 
remediation costs can be reliably estimated, a provision is recognised. 

Restructuring (closed sites) provision 

Provisions for restructuring costs are recognised at the point when a detailed restructuring plan is in place and the Group has 
either started to implement the plan or has announced the main features of the plan to those affected. Restructuring provisions 
include only direct expenditures necessarily entailed by the restructuring. 

Vacant property provision 

The Group recognises provisions for all vacant leasehold property which the Group has substantially ceased to use for the 
purpose of its business and where subletting is unlikely, or would be at a reduced rental compared to that being paid under the 
head lease. The provision recognised represents the estimated future unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the 
leases during the remaining lease term. 

Revenue recognition  

The Group has applied IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers using the cumulative effect method; therefore, the 
comparative information has not been restated in accordance with the transition exemptions available under IFRS 15. The 
following reflects the new revenue recognition policy adopted for the current reporting period onwards. 

Revenue is measured based on the consideration received or receivable as specified in a contract with a customer and represents 
amounts receivable for goods supplied, stated net of discounts, returns and value added taxes. Revenue excludes amounts 
collected on behalf of third parties. Revenue comprises sales and charges for vehicles sold and services rendered during the 
period, including sales to other Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited group companies but excluding inter-company sales 
within the Group.  

85

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Revenue recognition (continued) 

The Group recognises revenue when it transfers control over a product or service to a customer, as described below. 

Sale of  motor vehicles, parts and aftersales services 

The Group generates revenue through the sale of new and used motor vehicles and through the provision of aftersales services 
in the form of vehicle servicing, maintenance and repairs. The Group recognises revenue from the sale of new and used motor 
vehicles when a customer takes possession of the vehicle, at which point they have an obligation to pay in full and as such control 
is considered to transfer at this point. The Group typically receives cash equal to the invoice amount for most direct retail sales 
to consumers at the time the consumer takes possession of the vehicle. When the consumer has taken out a finance (PCP) 
agreement to purchase the vehicle, the Group receives payment from the finance company at the time the consumer takes 
possession of the vehicle. Payment terms on sales to corporate customers typically range from 7 to 60 days. The Group 
recognises revenue from the provision of aftersales services when the service has been completed, at which point customers 
have an obligation to pay in full. The Group typically receives cash equal to the invoice amount for most direct retail sales to 
consumers at the time the service has been completed. Payment terms on sales to corporate customers typically range from 
30 to 60 days. 

Sale of  warranty products 

Income received in respect of warranty policies sold and administered by the Group is recognised over the period during which 
a customer can exercise their rights under the warranty; as such, revenue is recognised over the period of the policy on a straight 
line basis. This is not a material revenue stream for the Group. 

Commission income 

The Group receives commissions when it arranges vehicle financing and related insurance products for its customers to purchase 
its products and services, acting as agent on behalf of various finance and insurance companies. Commissions are based on 
agreed rates. 

Where the Group acts as an agent on behalf of a principal, the associated income is recognised within revenue on completion 
of the arranging of the various products (i.e. at the point at which control passes to the customer). 

Rental income 

Rental income arising from operating leases on investment properties is recognised in revenue on a straight line basis over the 
period of the lease. Rental income is not disclosed separately from revenue from contracts with customers in the Consolidated 
Statement of Comprehensive Income due to the immateriality of this income stream.  

Contract liabilities 

Where the Group receives an amount of consideration in advance of completion of performance obligations under a contract 
with a customer, the value of the advance consideration is initially recognised as a contact liability in liabilities. Revenue is 
subsequently recognised as the performance obligations are completed over the period of the contract (i.e. as control is passed 
to the customer). Contract liabilities are presented within trade and other payables in the Consolidated Balance Sheet and 
disclosed in Note 22 ‘Trade and Other Payables’.  

Contract costs 

The Group applies the practical expedient in paragraph 94 of IFRS 15 and recognises the incremental costs of obtaining contracts 
as an expense when incurred if the amortisation period of the assets that the Group otherwise would have recognised is one 
year or less. 

Transaction price allocation to remaining performance obligations 

The Group applies the practical expedient in paragraph 121 of IFRS 15 and does not disclose information about remaining 
performance obligations that have original expected durations of one year or less. 

86

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Revenue recognition (continued) 

Disaggregation of  revenue 

Revenue recognised from contracts with customers has been disaggregated into categories that depict how the nature, amount, 
timing and uncertainty of revenue and cash flows are affected by economic factors. This disclosure, as well as the reconciliation 
between the disaggregated revenue disclosures and the revenue figures disclosed for each of the Group’s reportable segments, 
is made in Note 5 ‘Segmental Information’. 

Comparative period revenue recognition accounting policy under IAS 18 Revenue 

Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable, and represents amounts receivable for goods 
supplied, stated net of discounts, returns and value added taxes. The Group recognises revenue when the amount of revenue 
can be reliably measured, when it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to the entity, and when specific criteria have 
been met for each of the Group’s activities, as described below. 

Revenue comprises sales and charges for vehicles sold and services rendered during the year including sales to other Marshall 
of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited group companies but excluding inter-company sales within the Group. Revenue from the sale 
of new and used vehicles is recognised at the point at which a customer takes possession of a vehicle. Revenue in respect of 
other services is recognised once the service has been provided. Income received in respect of warranty policies sold and 
administered by the Group is recognised over the period of the policy on a straight line basis.  

Where the Group acts as an agent on behalf of a principal, the associated income is recognised within revenue in the period in 
which the product is sold. Revenue also comprises commissions receivable for arranging vehicle financing and related insurance 
products. Commissions are based on agreed rates and the income is recognised when the vehicle is recognised as sold.  

Rental income 

Vehicles leased out under finance leases, which are leases where substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the 
assets are passed to the lessee and hire purchase contracts, are shown as debtors in the Consolidated Balance Sheet at the 
amount of the net investment in the lease. The interest elements of the rental obligations are credited to the Consolidated 
Statement of Comprehensive Income over the period of the lease and are apportioned based on a pattern reflecting a constant 
periodic rate of return. Finance lease income is presented in revenue. 

Rental income arising from operating leases on vehicles and investment properties is recognised in revenue on a straight line 
basis over the period of the lease. Vehicles leased out under operating leases are held within property, plant and equipment at 
their cost to the Group and are depreciated to their residual values over the terms of the leases. The vehicle assets held for 
contract rental are transferred into inventory at their carrying amount when they cease to be leased out and become available 
for sale in the Group’s ordinary course of business. 

Deferred income 

Where the Group receives an amount in advance of future income streams the value of the receipt is amortised over the period 
of the contract as the services are delivered. The unexpired element is disclosed in other liabilities as deferred income. 

Supplier income  

The Group receives income from brand partners and other suppliers. The Group receives income from its suppliers based on 
specific agreements in place. These are generally based on achieving certain objectives such as specific sales volumes and 
maintaining agreed operational standards. This supplier income received is recognised as a deduction from cost of sales at the 
point when it is reasonably certain that the targets have been achieved for the relevant period and when income can be measured 
reliably based on the terms of each relevant supplier agreement.  

Supplier income that has been earned but not invoiced at the balance sheet date is recognised in other receivables and primarily 
relates to volume-based incentives that run up to the period end. 

87

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Discontinued operations  

A discontinued operation is a component of the Group that has been disposed of and that either represents a separate major line 
of business or geographical area of operations, is part of a single coordinated plan to dispose of such a line of business or 
geographical area of operations or is a subsidiary which was acquired exclusively with a view to resale. The results of discontinued 
operations are presented separately in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income. 

Leases 

A lease is an agreement whereby the lessor conveys to the lessee, in return for a payment or a series of payments, the right to 
use a specific asset for an agreed period of time. Leases under which the Group assumes substantially all the risks and rewards 
of ownership of the underlying asset are classified as finance leases. All other leases are classified as operating leases. 

Group as lessee 

Rental charges payable under operating leases are charged to the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income on a 
straight line basis over the lease term. 

Group as lessor 

Where the Group is a lessor under an operating lease, the asset is capitalised within property, plant and equipment and 
depreciated over its useful economic life or is capitalised within investment property. Payments received under operating leases 
are recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. 

Where the Group is a lessor under a finance lease, the amount due from the lessee is recognised as a receivable at the amount 
of the Group’s net investment in the lease. Finance lease income is allocated to accounting periods to reflect a constant periodic 
rate of return on the Group’s net investment outstanding in respect of the lease. The Group’s finance lease as lessor activates 
were discontinued in the prior period following the disposal of Marshall Leasing Limited. 

Share-based payments 

The Group operates a number of equity-settled, share-based compensation plans through which the Group allows employees 
to receive shares in the Company. 

Equity-settled share-based payments are measured at fair value (calculated excluding the effect of service and non-market based 
performance vesting conditions) at the date of grant. The share-based payment charge to be expensed is determined by reference 
to  the  fair  value  of  share  options  granted  and  is  recognised  as  an  employee  expense  within  underlying  earnings,  with  a 
corresponding increase in equity.  

The share-based payment charge is recognised on a straight-line basis over the vesting period (being the period over which all 
vesting conditions are to be satisfied). An award subject to graded vesting is accounted for as though it were multiple, separate 
awards, the number of awards being determined in direct correlation to the number of instalments in which the options vest. 

The share-based payment charge is based on the Group’s estimate of the number of options that are expected to vest. At each 
balance sheet date, the Group revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected to vest based on the non-market 
performance vesting conditions and service conditions. The Group’s remuneration policy gives the Remuneration Committee 
discretion to revise performance conditions to adjust for the impact of Group restructurings and reorganisations on incentive 
outcomes. The impact of any revisions to original vesting estimates or performance conditions is recognised in the Consolidated 
Statement of Comprehensive Income with a corresponding adjustment to equity. 

Social security contributions payable in connection with share options granted are considered to be an integral part of the grant 
and are, therefore, treated as cash-settled transactions. For cash settled share-based payments, the Group recognises a liability 
for the services acquired, measured initially at the fair value of the liability. This liability is re-measured at each balance sheet 
date and at the date of settlement, with any changes in fair value recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive 
Income. 

88

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Share-based payments (continued) 

When options are exercised, the Company issues new shares. These shares are gifted to the Employee Benefit Trust by the 
Company at nominal value. The cost of these shares is recognised as a reduction to equity in the own shares reserve. When the 
options are exercised and the shares transferred to the employees, the cost on the own shares reserve is transferred to equity. 

When options issued by the Employee Benefit Trust are exercised the own shares reserve is reduced and a gain or loss is 
recognised in reserves based on proceeds less weighted-average cost of shares initially purchased now exercised. 

Where shares options are forfeited, effective from the date of the forfeiture, any share-based payment charge previously 
recognised in both the current and prior periods in relation to these options is reversed though the Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income with a corresponding adjustment through the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity.  

Net finance costs 

The Group has no borrowing costs with respect to the acquisition or construction of qualifying assets, therefore, no borrowing 
costs are capitalised. Qualifying items of property, plant and equipment are considered to be those which take a substantial 
period of time to get ready for their intended use. These would include assets which are under construction for periods in excess 
of a year; the Group’s dealership development programmes are not considered to qualify. 

Finance costs 

Finance costs comprise interest payable on borrowings, stock financing charges and other interest. 

Finance income 

Finance income comprises interest receivable on funds invested. Interest income is recognised in the Consolidated Statement 
of Comprehensive Income as it accrues using the effective interest method. 

Taxation 

The taxation charge comprises corporation tax payable, deferred tax and any adjustments to tax payable in respect of previous 
years. 

Current taxation 

The current tax payable is based on the Group’s taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the 
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income because it excludes items of income or expenditure that are taxable or 
deductible in other years and items of income or expenditure that are never taxable income or tax deductible expenditure. The 
Group’s liability for current tax is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet 
date. 

Deferred taxation 

Deferred taxation is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amount of assets and 
liabilities in the consolidated financial statements and their tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit. Deferred taxation 
is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method.  

Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences and deferred tax assets are recognised to 
the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which deductible temporary differences can be utilised. 
Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or from the 
initial recognition of other assets and liabilities in a transaction that affects neither the taxable profit nor the accounting profit.  

Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries, except for deferred tax liabilities where 
the timing of the reversal of the temporary difference is controlled by the Group and it is probable that the temporary difference 
will not reverse in the foreseeable future. 

89

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Taxation (continued) 

Deferred taxation (continued) 

A deferred tax asset is recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the 
deductible temporary differences can be utilised. The carrying amount of deferred tax assets are reviewed at each balance sheet 
date and are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that the related tax benefit will be realised. 

The Group’s deferred tax balances are calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance 
sheet date and that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised. Deferred tax is charged 
or credited in the income statement, except where it relates to items charged or credited directly to other comprehensive income 
or equity, in which case the deferred tax is also dealt with in other comprehensive income or equity respectively. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets against current 
tax liabilities and when the deferred tax assets and liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority on either 
the taxable entity or different taxable entities where there is an intention to settle the balances on a net basis. 

Pensions 
Defined contribution pension plans 

A defined contribution plan is a pension plan under which the employer/employee pays contributions into a separate fund managed 
and administered by a third party. The employer has no legal or constructive obligation to pay further contributions if the fund 
does not hold sufficient assets to pay employees the benefits relating to their service and contributions in current and prior periods.  

The Group operates the Marshall Motor Holdings Defined Contribution Pension Scheme. 

Until 31 December 2018, the Group also participated in the defined contribution section of the Marshall Group Executive Pension 
Plan (“the Plan”) which is operated by Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited acting as principal employer. The Plan also has 
a defined benefit section 

Where the Group makes employer pension contributions, the Group’s contributions to both sections of the Plan are charged to 
the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income as they become payable. 

Defined benefit pension plans  

A defined benefit plan is a pension plan which defines the amount of pension benefit that an employee will receive on retirement, 
usually dependant on one or more factors such as age, years of service and remuneration. 

By virtue of historic employment relationships, the Group was, until 31 December 2018, a participating employer in the defined 
benefit pension section of the Marshall Group Executive Pension Plan (“the Plan”). The Plan is non-sectionalised, therefore, the 
assets of the Plan are not allocated to or directly associated with individual participating employers of the Plan. There is no 
contractual agreement or stated policy for charging the net defined benefit cost between participating employers in the Plan, 
therefore, any contributions would be accounted for as if they were being made to a defined contribution scheme. 

On 31 December 2018, the Group ceased to be a participating employer in the Plan as a result of it no longer employing any 
active members of the defined contribution section of the Plan. Accordingly, on 31 December 2018, a debt was triggered under 
Section 75 of the Pension Act 1995 on the Group (“Employer Debt”). On 7 February 2019 the Plan’s actuary issued a certificate 
for the purposes of Regulation 5(18) and Regulation 6(8) of the Occupational Pension Schemes (Employer Debt) Regulations 
2005 confirming that the Employer Debt at 31 December 2018 was £5,541,000. On 25 February 2019 the Group paid the 
Employer Debt (together with Trustee expenses of £25,000) to the Trustees of the Plan and entered into a Deed of De-Adherence 
with the Trustees and Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited confirming the discharge of the Group from the trusts of the Plan 
and from any further obligations in relation to the Plan with effect from that date. The Employer debt was utilised against the 
provision of £6,000,000 recognised in the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2017. 

Details of the latest actuarial valuation of the Plan are disclosed in the financial statements of the principal employer, Marshall of 
Cambridge (Holdings) Limited.  

90

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2.  Accounting policies (continued) 

Alternative performance measures 

Certain items recognised in reported profit or loss before tax can vary significantly from year to year, therefore, these create 
volatility in reported earnings which does not reflect the Group’s underlying performance. The Directors believe that the ‘underlying 
profit before tax’ and ‘underlying basic earnings per share’ measures presented provide a clear and consistent presentation of 
the underlying performance of the Group’s on-going business for shareholders. Underlying profit is not defined under IFRS, 
therefore, it may not be directly comparable with the ‘adjusted’ profit measures of other companies. 

Non-underlying items are defined as follows: 

– Acquisition costs; 
– Profits/losses arising on closure or disposal of businesses; 
– Restructuring and reorganisation costs – these are one-off in nature and do not relate to the Group’s underlying performance; 
Investment property fair value movements – these reflect the difference between the fair value of an investment property at 
–
the reporting date and its carrying amount at the previous reporting date; 

– One-off tax items and pension charges; and 
– Asset impairments. 

Similarly, the Directors believe that the impact of acquisitions and disposals distort the value of comparative information provided. 
Therefore, the measure of ‘like-for-like’ financial performance is used to present consistent, comparative information. Results on  
a ‘like-for-like’; basis include only the Group’s businesses that have been active and trading for a period of 12 consecutive months. 

Business that are excluded from the definition of ‘like-for-like’ are those sites that have recently commenced operation, therefore 
do not have a 12-month trading history, as well as any businesses that were closed and market segments or activities that were 
ceased during the current or previous year. See Appendix on page 143 for full details. 

3.  Changes in accounting policies and disclosures 

Except where disclosed otherwise in this note, the accounting policies adopted in the preparation of the consolidated financial 
statements  are  consistent  with  those  applied  when  preparing  the  consolidated  financial  statements  for  the  year  ended 
31 December 2017. 

New standards, amendments and interpretations adopted by the Group 

The following amendments to existing standards became effective on 1 January 2018 and have been adopted in the consolidated 
financial statements for the first time during the year ended 31 December 2018. These have been assessed as having no financial 
or disclosure impact on the numbers presented.  

•
•

IAS 40 Transfers to Investment Property (amendments to IAS 40) 
IFRS 2 Classification and Measurements of  Share-based Payment Transactions (amendments to IFRS 2) 

IFRS 2 Classification and Measurements of  Share-based Payment Transactions (amendments to IFRS 2) 

The IASB issued amendments to IFRS 2 Share-Based Payment that address three main areas. These are: the effects of vesting 
conditions on the measurement of a cash-settled share-based payment transaction, the classification of a share-based payment 
transaction with net settlement features for withholding tax obligations and accounting where a modification to the terms and 
conditions of a share-based payment transaction changes its classification from cash settled to equity settled.  

These amendments are adopted prospectively. Therefore, application of the amendments does not require the restating of prior 
periods. 

The Group’s accounting policy for cash-settled share based payments is consistent with the approach clarified in the amendments. 

91

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

3.  Changes in accounting policies and disclosures (continued) 

New standards, amendments and interpretations adopted by the Group (continued) 

IFRS 2 Classification and Measurements of  Share-based Payment Transactions (amendments to IFRS 2) (continued) 

The Group’s equity-settled share-based payment transactions have net settlement modification features to allow for withholding 
tax obligations. The amendment permits the entire transaction to continue to be treated as equity-settled with a debit to equity at 
the point of settlement to set up the liability. Any incremental fair value is charged to the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive 
Income. The Group applied the amendment to the exercises of share awards which took place in April 2018. This was the first 
time the Group had utilised the option for net settlement of awards. 

The following new standards became effective on 1 January 2018 for the current reporting period. The Group had to change its 
accounting policies and make adjustments as a result of adopting these standards: 

•
•

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments 
IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers 

The impact of the adoption of these standards are disclosed below. The accounting policies above have been updated to include 
the new accounting policies. 

Impact on current period of  the adoption of  new standards, amendments and interpretations 

a)

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments 

The Group has adopted IFRS 9 Financial Instruments issued in July 2014 with a date of initial application of 1 January 2018. 
The requirements of IFRS 9 represent a significant change from IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. 
The nature and effects of the key changes to the Group’s accounting policies resulting from its adoption of IFRS 9 are summarised 
below. 

Additionally, the Group adopted consequential amendments to IFRS 9 Financial Instruments: Disclosures that are applied to 
disclosures about 2018 but generally have not been applied to comparative information in compliance with IFRS 9. 

Classification of  financial assets and financial liabilities 

IFRS 9 contains three principal classification categories for financial assets: measured at amortised cost, fair value reported in 
other comprehensive income (FVOCI) and fair value reported in profit and loss (FVPL). The classification of financial assets 
under IFRS 9 is generally based on the business model in which a financial asset is managed based on its contractual cash flow 
characteristics. IFRS 9 eliminates the previous IAS 39 categories of held to maturity, loans and receivables and available for 
sale. For an explanation of how the Group classifies and measures financial assets and accounts for related gains and losses 
under IFRS 9, see the ‘Financial Assets’ accounting policy. 

The adoption of IFRS 9 has not had a significant effect on the Group’s accounting policies for financial liabilities. 

Impairment of  financial assets 

IFRS 9 replaces the ‘incurred loss’ model in IAS 39 with an ‘expected credit loss’ (ECL) model. The new impairment model applies 
to financial assets measured at amortised cost. Under IFRS 9, credit losses are recognised earlier than under IAS 39. 

Hedge accounting 

IFRS 9 introduces a new general hedge accounting model. The Group has not previously applied hedge accounting under IAS 
39, and has not commenced hedge accounting under IFRS 9; therefore, this change has had no impact on the Group’s financial 
statements. 

92

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

3.  Changes in accounting policies and disclosures (continued) 

Impact on current period of  the adoption of  new standards, amendments and interpretations (continued) 

a)

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments (continued) 

Transition 

Changes in accounting policies resulting from the adoption of IFRS 9 have been applied retrospectively, except as described 
below: 

•

•

Comparative figures have not been restated. Differences in the carrying amounts of financial assets resulting from the 
adoption of IFRS 9 have been recognised in opening retained earnings and reserves as at 1 January 2018 in accordance 
with IFRS 9. Accordingly, the information presented for the year ended 31 December 2017 does not generally reflect the 
requirements of IFRS 9 and is not comparable to the information presented for the year ended 31 December 2018 under 
IFRS 9. 
The assessment of the determination of the business model within which a financial asset is held has been made on the 
basis of the facts and circumstances that existed at 1 January 2018, the date of initial application. 

The following table summarises the impact, net of tax, of transition to IFRS 9 on reserves and retained earnings at 1 January 
2018. 

Closing balance as at 31 December 2017 - IAS 39

Recognition of expected credit losses from adoption of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018

Deferred tax credit on transition adjustment

Opening balance as at 1 January 2018 - IFRS 9

£’000 

119,399 

(91) 

15 

119,323 

Classification and measurement of  financial assets and financial liabilities on the date of  initial application of  IFRS9 

The following table shows the original measurement categories under IAS 39 and the new measurement categories under IFRS 
9 for each class of the Group’s financial assets as at 1 January 2018. 

New
Original classification  classification
under IFRS 9

under IAS 39

Trade and other receivables

Loans and receivables Amortised cost

Cash and cash equivalents

Loans and receivables Amortised cost

Original
carrying
amount
under IAS 39
£’000

New 
carrying 
amount 
under IFRS 9 
£’000 

92,141

4,867

92,050 

4,867 

Trade and other receivables that were classified as loans and receivables under IAS 39 are now classified as at amortised cost. 
An increase of £91,000 in the allowance for impairment was recognised in opening retained earnings as at 1 January 2018 on 
transition to IFRS 9.  

There has been no change in the classification and measurement of financial liabilities on the transition to IFRS 9. 

b) 

IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers  

The Group has adopted IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers issued in May 2014 with a date of initial application 
of 1 January 2018. As a result, the Group has changed its accounting policy for revenue recognition as detailed below. 

The Group has applied IFRS 15 using the modified retrospective approach (i.e. by recognising the cumulative effect of initially 
applying IFRS 15 as an adjustment to the opening balance of retained earnings as at 1 January 2018). Therefore, the comparative 
information has not been restated in accordance with the transition exemptions available under IFRS 15. 

No changes to the timing and measurement of revenue across the Group’s revenue streams have been identified on transition 
to IFRS 15. 

93

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

3.  Changes in accounting policies and disclosures (continued) 

New standards, amendments and interpretations not yet adopted by the Group 

The following standards, amendments and interpretations were in issue, but were not yet effective at the balance sheet date. 
These standards have not been applied when preparing the consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 December 
2018. 

                                                                                                                               Date issued

Effective for 
accounting periods 
beginning on or after 

IFRS 16 Leases (see below)                                                                                January 2016
IFRIC 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments                                                   June 2017

1 January 2019 
1 January 2019 

Impact on future periods of  the adoption of  new standards, amendments and interpretations 

IFRS 16 Leases 

Overview 

IFRS 16 Leases was issued by the IASB in January 2016 and will replace IAS 17 Leases, IFRIC 4 Determining whether an 
arrangement contains a Lease, SIC-15 Operating Leases-Incentives and SIC-27 Evaluating the Substance of  Transactions 
Involving the Legal Form of  a Lease. IFRS 16 is due to take effect for accounting periods commencing on or after 1 January 
2019. The Group will adopt the new standard in 2019 and will apply IFRS 16 for the first time in the interim report for the six 
months ending 30 June 2019 and the annual report for the year ending 31 December 2019. 

Lessee accounting 

IFRS 16 removes the current distinction between operating leases and finance leases and requires that, for all leases, a right-of-
use asset and a financial liability are recognised in the Consolidated Balance Sheet. The asset represents the right to use the 
leased asset and the financial liability represents the commitments payable under the lease and is substantively different to the 
existing accounting. 

Operating lease rental charges in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income will be replaced by interest charges 
and depreciation expenses. The timing of the recognition of these lease costs will also change on adoption of IFRS 16, with 
increased costs being recognised in the earlier years of the lease due to interest being recognised at a constant rate on the 
carrying value of the lease liability.  

The classification of lease payments in the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows changes from being exclusively operating 
cash flows to a combination of operating cash flows (reflecting the interest portion of lease payments) and financing cash flows 
(reflecting the principal portion of the lease liability). 

Lessor accounting 

With the exception of where the Group is an intermediate lessor, the adoption of IFRS 16 Leases does not significantly change 
the Group’s lessor accounting. Lessors will continue to classify leases using the same classification principle as in IAS 17 and 
will continue to distinguish between two types of leases: operating leases and finance leases. On adoption of IFRS 16, in situations 
where the Group is an intermediate lessor, the Group will account for its interests in head leases and sub-leases separately. 

Based on initial impact assessments completed to date, the Group anticipates that the majority of properties for which the Group 
is an intermediate lessor (i.e. sublets property in which it has an interest as lessee in a head lease) will meet the definition of a 
finance lease and will be accounted for and disclosed as such on adoption if IFRS 16. As a result, new finance lease receivables 
will be recognised on adoption of IFRS 16. 

94

                                                                                                                                                   
                                                                                                                                                   
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

3. Changes in accounting policies and disclosures (continued) 

Impact on future periods of  the adoption of  new standards, amendments and interpretations (continued) 

IFRS 16 Leases (continued) 

Transition 

The Group is currently finalising a detailed impact assessment to determine the impact and transition adjustments that the adoption 
of IFRS 16 will have on the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows and 
the Consolidated Balance Sheet.  

As a result of these assessments, the Group currently expects to adopt the standard using the retrospective method. Therefore, 
the cumulative impact of adoption will be recognised in retained earnings as of 1 January 2018 and comparatives for 2018 will 
be restated. 

The Group intends to apply the recognition exemptions available for short-term leases and leases for low-value assets, both of 
which exist in the Group’s lease portfolio. The Group also intends to elect to apply the practical expedient permitting IFRS 16 to 
be applied only to contracts that were previously identified as leases under IAS 17 and IFRIC 4. Therefore, the Group will not 
apply IFRS 16 to contracts that were not previously identified under IAS 17 and IFRIC 4 as containing a lease. At this stage, the 
Group is not aware of any leases where the definition may differ between IFRS 16 and IAS 17/IFRIC 4. 

Estimated financial impact of  adoption 

Based on analysis of the Group’s lease portfolio at the transition date, the Group’s assets are expected to increase in the region 
of £86,000,000 being the net impact of the recognition of right-of-use assets, derecognition of long leasehold property costs and 
the recognition of finance lease receivables on subleases. There is expected to be a corresponding approximate £92,500,000 
increase in liabilities resulting from the net effect of recognising lease liabilities and derecognising vacant property provisions. 
The adoption of IFRS 16 is anticipated to result in a reduction of the Group’s net assets in the region of £6,500,000. 

On restatement, an immaterial reduction to the Group’s profit before tax for the year ended 31 December 2018 is expected. 

The Group continues to finalise procedures and accounting policy choices required to apply the new requirements of IFRS 16. 
As a result, revisions to the estimated impact of adoption may arise prior to the issue of the 30 June 2019 Interim Report and 
Accounts. However, at this time, any such revisions are not expected to be significant. 

4.  Significant accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions 

The Directors are required to make judgements, estimates and assumptions about the future when applying the Group’s 
accounting policies (as detailed in Note 2 ‘Accounting Policies’) to determine the amounts of assets, liabilities, revenue and 
expenses reported in the consolidated financial statements. Actual amounts may differ from these estimates.  

The Directors regularly review these judgements, estimates and assumptions and any resulting revisions to accounting estimates 
are recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised. If the change in estimation impacts future accounting periods, the 
revision is recognised in the current and future periods. 

Critical accounting judgements 

The accounting judgements and assumptions (excluding those which also involve estimates which are covered in the key sources 
of estimation uncertainty section below) included in the consolidated financial statements which have a material impact on amounts 
reported are as detailed below. 

95

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

4.  Significant accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions (continued) 

Critical accounting judgements (continued) 

Determination of  indefinite useful economic life 

Goodwill and franchise agreements are intangible assets acquired through business combinations. An asset is considered to 
have an indefinite useful economic life if there is no foreseeable limit to the period over which the asset is expected to generate 
net cash inflows for the Group. The useful economic life of goodwill and franchise agreements is determined at the point of initial 
recognition. Each franchise agreement is different; each contract being for varying durations, with varying renewal or termination 
options. Previous franchise agreements acquired have historically either been renewed without substantial cost or not had 
termination options exercised. This past experience, coupled with the strength of the Group’s relationships with brand partners, 
determines that these assets have indefinite useful economic lives. 

Significant financing components when determining transaction prices 

The nature of the Group’s activities is such that, with the exception of certain commission arrangements, the Group does not 
have any contracts where the period between the transfer of the promised goods or services to the customer and payment by 
the customer exceeds one year. Certain commissions are received in advance of the Group selling the associated finance or 
insurance products (as an agent). The advance commissions are paid upfront and typically relate to periods of two to three years, 
depending on the arrangement. The advance commissions are recognised in revenue when sales of finance or insurance products 
are made. This can be over a year after the receipt of the advance.  

Nevertheless, there is not deemed to be a financing component because, being an agency arrangement, the timing of the 
recognition of the commission income varies on the basis of the occurrence of future events that are not substantially within the 
control of the customer or the Group. As a consequence, the Group does not adjust any of the transaction prices for the time 
value of money. 

Key sources of  estimation uncertainty 

The accounting estimates included in the consolidated financial statements which have a material impact on amounts reported 
are as detailed below. 

Goodwill and other intangible asset impairment 

Goodwill is deemed to have an indefinite useful economic life and is not amortised. As a result, the Group reviews goodwill for 
impairment on at least an annual basis and more frequently where there are indicators of potential impairment. The impairment 
review requires the value-in-use of each CGU to be estimated; these calculations are based on a number of assumptions. Areas 
of significant judgement include: 

–
–
–
–

the estimation of future cash flows 
the selection of risk and the estimation of risk adjustment factors to be applied to cash flows  
the selection of an appropriate discount rate to calculate present value 
the selection of an appropriate terminal growth rate. 

The assumptions used in the impairment test are detailed in Note 15(b) ‘Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets’. The assumptions 
relating to future cash flows, estimated useful economic lives and discount rates are based on forecasts and are inherently 
judgemental. Future events could result in the assumptions used needing to be revised, changing the outcome of the impairment 
test and resulting in impairment charges being recognised. 

96

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

4.  Significant accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions (continued) 

Key sources of  estimation uncertainty (continued) 

Inventory valuation 

Inventories are stated at the lower of their cost and their net realisable value (being the fair value of the motor vehicles less costs 
to sell). Fair values are assessed using reputable industry valuation data which is based upon recent industry activity and forecasts. 
Whilst this data is deemed representative of the current value of vehicles held in inventory it is possible that the price at which 
the vehicles are actually sold will differ from the vehicles’ industry valuations. Where this is the case, adjustments arise in the 
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income on the sale of vehicles held in inventory.  

Industry valuations are sensitive to rapid changes in regulatory and market conditions which are difficult to anticipate. In light of 
the materiality of the inventory balance in the Consolidated Balance Sheet, this uncertainty is considered to represent a key 
source of estimation uncertainty. The inventory provision as at 31 December 2018 represents 2.5% of the gross inventory balance 
(2017:  2.2%). A  100bps  change  in  this  ratio  in  2018  would  have  changed  the  charge  to  the  Consolidated  Statement  of 
Comprehensive Income by approximately £4.1 million (2017: £4.0 million).  

Reassessment of  previous areas of  estimation uncertainty 

Following a review of the Group’s sources of estimation uncertainty, it has been concluded that the following are no longer key 
areas of estimation that have a significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment in the next financial year to the amounts 
currently reported. 

Taxation 

Following the payment of the settlement in respect of a tax issue inherited on acquisition (see Note 24 ‘Provisions’), the Group 
currently has no material open income tax issues with the tax authorities. Therefore, estimation uncertainty inherent in the Group’s 
provisions for uncertain income tax treatments is no longer considered to represent a significant risk of a material adjustment 
being required to the carrying amount of either current or deferred tax provisions in subsequent accounting periods.  

Where the final tax treatment applied on finalisation of the Group’s corporation tax returns differs to the assumptions used when 
calculating the amounts currently recognised, these differences impact the current and/or deferred tax provisions in the period in 
which the final tax treatment is determined. No single item is expected to give rise to a material adjustment in subsequent years, 
neither are individual differences when taken in aggregate. 

Pension provision valuation 

As described in Note 32 ‘Pensions’, the Group undertook a strategic pension review in the prior year which resulted in the Group 
ceasing to be a participant in the defined benefit section of the Plan in December 2018. Based on the status of discussions as at 
31 December 2017, it was reasonably probable that this review would result in the Group ceasing participation in this pension 
scheme. Therefore, a provision was recognised for the estimated amount which would become payable in accordance with 
Section 75 of the Pensions Act 1995 were the Group to cease to participate in the Plan (the “Employer Debt”). 

As a result of ceasing to participate in the defined benefit section of the Plan in December 2018, the Employer Debt was crystallised 
triggering a formal actuarial valuation. Per this valuation the Employer Debt is £5,541,000, such that there is no future estimation 
uncertainty. 

97

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

5.  Segmental information 

a) Operating segments – 2018 onwards 

IFRS 8 Operating Segments requires operating segments to be consistent with the internal management reporting provided to 
the Chief Operating Decision Maker who is responsible for allocating resources and assessing the performance of the operating 
segments. The Group considers the Chief Executive Officer to be the Chief Operating Decision Maker. 

The Group has identified its key product and service lines as being its operating segments because both performance and 
strategic decisions are analysed at this level. The IFRS 8 aggregation criteria have been met as a result of the Group’s key 
product and service lines sharing common characteristics such as; similar types of customer for the products and services, similar 
nature of the product and service offerings, similar methods used to distribute the products and provide the services and similar 
regulatory and economic environment. As a result of these criteria being satisfied, the Group’s operating segments constitute 
one reportable segment (retail) and all segmental information has been disclosed as such. The retail segment includes sales of 
new and used vehicles, together with the associated ancillary aftersales services of; servicing, body shop repairs and parts sales.  

The Group has concluded that rental income arising from investment properties does not meet the quantitative thresholds required 
to constitute a reportable segment as defined in IFRS 8. Due to the non-material nature of these amounts, they are combined 
with the retail segment rather than being disclosed separately. As a result, all of the Group’s activities are disclosed within the 
one reportable segment – the retail segment. 

Geographical information 

Revenue earned from sales is disclosed by origin and is not materially different from revenue by destination. All of the Group’s 
revenue is generated in the United Kingdom. 

Information about reportable segment 

All segment revenue, profit before taxation, assets and liabilities are attributable to the principal activity of the Group being the 
provision of car and commercial vehicle sales, vehicle service and other related services. 

The following tables show the disaggregation of revenue by major product/service lines for continuing operations: 

                                                                                                               Revenue                                      Gross Profit 
For the year ended 31 December 2018

£’000

£’000

mix*

mix 

New Car

Used Car

Aftersales

Internal / Other

Total

1,064,830

920,237

246,116

(44,296)

47.7%

41.2%

11.1%

- 

76,349

66,753

112,300

275

2,186,887

100%

255,677

29.9% 

26.1% 

44.0% 

-  

100% 

                                                                                                               Revenue                                      Gross Profit 
For the year ended 31 December 2017

£’000

£’000

mix*

mix 

New Car

Used Car

Aftersales

Internal / Other

Total

1,166,471

869,733

243,064

(47,289)

51.2%

38.2%

10.6%

- 

84,086

59,918

113,975

322

2,231,979

100%

258,301

32.6% 

23.2% 

44.2% 

-  

100% 

*mix calculation excludes Internal / Other Sales 

Prior to the disposal of Marshall Leasing Limited, the Group’s business was split into two main revenue-generating operating 
segments and a third support segment. No significant judgments were made in determining the reporting segments. 

98

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

5.  Segmental information (continued) 

b) Operating segments – prior periods 

Retail 

The retail segment included sales of new and used vehicles, together with the associated ancillary aftersales services of; servicing, 
body shop repairs and parts sales. 

Leasing 

The leasing segment included the leasing of vehicles to end consumers and fleet customers. 

Unallocated 

The unallocated segment included the Group’s head office and central management functions including; the Board, group finance 
functions, the human resources department, the IT department and all governance and compliance related functions in support 
of the wider business. Also included was rental income arising from investment properties. 

All segment revenue, profit before taxation, assets and liabilities were attributable to the principal activity of the Group being the 
provision of car and commercial vehicle sales, leasing, vehicle service and other related services. 

Geographical information 

Revenue earned from sales was disclosed by origin and was not materially different from revenue by destination. All of the 
Group’s revenue was generated in the United Kingdom. 

Information about reportable segments 

Information related to each reportable segment is set out below. 

For the year ended 31 December 2017

Revenue 

Total revenue

Total revenue from external customers

Depreciation and amortisation

Segment operating profit/(loss)

Other income - profit on disposal of subsidiary

Net finance costs

Underlying profit/(loss) before tax

Non-underlying items

Profit/(loss) before taxation

Total assets

Total liabilities

Retail
£’000

Leasing 
(Discontinued)
£’000

Unallocated
£’000

Total 
£’000 

2,231,696

2,231,696

(9,190)

34,714

- 

(6,586)

34,911

(6,783)

28,128

762,304

537,064

36,969

36,969

(4)

4,286

36,851

(580)

3,706

36,851

40,557

- 

- 

283

283

(27)

(14,617)

- 

(933)

(9,550)

(6,000)

(15,550)

2,268,948 

2,268,948 

(9,221) 

24,383 

36,851 

(8,099) 

29,067 
24,068  
53,135 

3,367

765,671 

37,397

574,461 

Additions in the period (including acquisitions) 

Property, plant, equipment and software assets

24,365

34,700

- 

59,065 

99

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

6. Profit before taxation 

Profit before taxation is arrived at after charging / (crediting):  

Depreciation of assets held for contract rental (note 16) (Discontinued)

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 16)

Amortisation of other intangibles (note 15)

Profit on disposal of assets classified as held for sale (note 7)

Loss on disposal of property plant and equipment

Loss on impairment of property, plant and equipment (note 16)

Loss on disposal of investment property 

Operating lease rentals - property

Operating lease rentals - vehicles and equipment

Intangible assets impairment

7. Non-underlying items 

Continuing operations 

Post-retirement benefits charge

Profit on disposal of assets classified as held for sale

Net release/(recognition) of restructuring costs and provisions

Loss on disposal of investment property

Loss on impairment of goodwill and other intangible assets

Discontinued operations 

Profit on disposal of subsidiary

Non-underlying items

Post-retirement benefits charge 

2018
£’000

- 

8,975

352

(268)

67

87

1,146

11,363

1,340

9,302

2018
£’000

-

268

3,217

(1,146)

(9,302)

(6,963)

589

(6,374)

2017 
£’000 

15,962 

8,917 

304 

-  

1,085 

945 

-  

11,698 

824 

-  

2017 
£’000 

(6,000) 

- 

(6,783) 

- 

- 

(12,783) 

36,851 

24,068 

See Note 32 ‘Pensions’ for further details of the transaction giving rise to the post-retirement benefits charge in the prior year. 

Profit on disposal of  assets classified as held for sale 

In May 2018, the Group sold the freehold property classified as held for sale as at 31 December 2017 for a profit of £268,000. 

Net release/(recognition) of  restructuring costs and provisions 

Restructuring costs during the current year include costs incurred as a result of the closure of one of the Group’s franchised 
dealerships. The closure arose in the context of the UK wide franchise network review carried out by Vauxhall. Restructuring 
costs include vacant property related costs of £154,000, redundancy costs of £280,000 and £252,000 of tangible asset impairment 
losses and write offs. Also included in the current year is a £4,160,000 release of vacant property and dilapidation provisions 
following  the  better  than  expected  exit  from  lease  commitments  noted  above  on  premises  no  longer  used  by  the  Group. 
£3,234,000 of the release relates to the exiting of a lease through the acquisition and immediate disposal of an investment property. 

Restructuring and reorganisation costs in the prior period represent the costs incurred as a result of the closure of five franchised 
dealerships and one used car centre.  

100

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

7. Non-underlying items (continued) 

Loss on disposal of  investment property 

In December 2018 the Group disposed of the investment property acquired in the year for proceeds of £4,654,000; resulting in 
a loss on disposal of £1,146,000. The acquisition and immediate disposal of the investment property provided the Group with a 
better than expected exit from the lease commitment. 

Loss on impairment of  goodwill and other intangible assets 

See Note 15 ‘Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets’ for further details of the transaction giving rise to the loss on impairment of 
goodwill and other intangible assets. 

Profit on disposal of  subsidiary 

See Note 8 ‘Discontinued Operations’ for further details of the transaction giving rise to the profit on disposal of subsidiary. 

8. Discontinued operations 

In November 2017 the Group disposed of Marshall Leasing Limited and its subsidiary (Gates Contract Hire Limited). A retention 
of £1,500,000 was withheld in respect of anticipated settlement of legacy defined benefit pension obligations triggered by the 
change in ownership of Marshall Leasing Limited. In April 2018, the surplus retention withheld was calculated and returned to the 
Group, generating an additional £589,000 profit on disposal of Marshall Leasing Limited and its subsidiary. 

a) Details of  the sale of  subsidiary 

Gross disposal consideration in cash

Pension retention

Net disposal consideration in cash

Less carrying value of net assets sold at 24 November 2017: 

– Property, plant and equipment

– Deferred tax

– Trade and other receivables

– Bank overdraft

– Trade and other payables

– Asset backed borrowings

– Corporation tax

Gain on sale of  subsidiary before income tax

Transaction costs

Net gain on sale of  subsidiary before income tax

Income tax expense on gain

Gain on sale of  subsidiary after income tax

Cash inflow on disposal of  subsidiary: 

Net disposal consideration in cash

Disposal of bank overdraft

Net cash flow from sale of  discontinued operation

101

2018
£’000

1,500

(911)

589

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

589

- 

589

- 

589

589

- 

589

2017 
£’000 

42,500 

(1,500) 

41,000 

78,959 

1,547 

2,510 

(3,695) 

(8,120) 

(68,185) 

(680) 

2,336 

38,664 

(1,813) 

36,851 

-  

36,851 

41,000 

3,695 

44,695 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

8. Discontinued operations (continued) 

b) Discontinued cash flow information 

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Purchase of property, plant, equipment and software

Proceeds from disposal of property, plant and equipment

Net cash outflow from investing activities

Proceeds from borrowings

Repayment of borrowings

Dividends paid

Net cash outflow from financing activities

Net decrease in cash generated by the subsidiary

c) Discontinued profit before taxation information 

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Net operating expenses

Operating profit

Other income - gain on disposal of subsidiary

Net finance costs

Profit before taxation

9. Auditor’s remuneration 

During the year the Group obtained the following services from the Group’s auditors:  

Audit services: 

– fees payable to the Company’s auditors for the audit of the parent  

Company and consolidated financial statements

– audit of Group’s subsidiaries

Fees payable to the Company’s auditors for other services: 

– review of interim condensed consolidated financial statements

Total auditor’s remuneration

102

2018
£’000

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

2018
£’000

-

-

-

-

-

589

-

589

2017 
£’000 

16,027 

(34,700) 

9,474 

(25,226) 

31,778 

(28,106) 

(18,712) 

(15,040) 

(24,239) 

2017 
£’000 

36,969 

(30,159) 

6,810 

(2,524) 

4,286 

36,851 

(580) 

40,557 

2018
£’000

2017 
£’000 

200

78

36

314

215 

78 

36 

329 

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

10. Employees and directors 

a)

Employee costs for the Group during the year 

The aggregate remuneration of employees and directors was: 

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Other pension costs

Share based payments

Employee costs are included in: 

Cost of sales

Net operating expenses

The average number of employees (including Executive Directors) was: 

Retail

Leasing (Discontinued)

Unallocated (Discontinued)

2018
£’000

114,367

13,383

1,999

732 

2017 
£’000 

115,905 

13,553 

8,059 

1,005  

130,481

138,522 

2018
£’000

13,505

116,976

130,481

2018

3,749

- 

-

3,749

2017 
£’000 

13,750 

124,772 

138,522 

2017 

3,616 

43 

264 

3,923 

The average number of Group employees excludes temporary and contract staff. 

b) Directors’ emoluments  

Details  of  the  remuneration  of  the  Directors,  their  share  incentives  and  pension  entitlements  are  set  out  in  the  Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on pages 53 to 60. 

c) Key management compensation 

The following table details the aggregate compensation paid in respect of key management personnel – which comprises both 
senior management who sit on the enlarged operational board and statutory directors. 

Wages and salaries

Post-employment benefits

Compensation for loss of office

Share-based payments

Details of the share option schemes are provided in Note 29 ‘Share-Based Payments’. 

2018
£’000

5,249

179 

- 

732 

6,160

2017 
£’000 

4,805  

273  

52  

1,005  

6,135  

103

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

11. Net finance costs 

Interest income on short term bank deposits

Net interest payable on asset backed finance (Discontinued)

Stock financing charges and other interest

Interest payable on bank borrowings

Net finance costs

12. Taxation  

a)

Taxation charge 

Current tax 

Current tax on profits for the year

Adjustments in respect of prior years

Total current tax charge

Deferred tax 

Origination and reversal of temporary differences

Adjustments in respect of prior years

Total deferred tax charge / (credit) (note 25)

Total taxation charge

Income tax expense is attributable to: 

Profit from continuing operations

Profit from discontinued operation

Total taxation charge

2018
£’000

(13)

- 

5,395

980

6,362

2018
£’000

5,106

(724)

4,382

650

(257)

393

4,775

4,775

- 

4,775

2017 
£’000 

(11) 

580 

5,385 

2,145 

8,099 

2017 
£’000 

5,651 

50 

5,701 

(2,015) 

110 

(1,905) 

3,796 

3,080 

716 

3,796 

The tax charge on discontinued operations amounting to £nil (2017: £716,000) all relates to tax payable on profit from operations.  

104

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

12. Taxation (continued) 

b) Reconciliation of  tax charge  

The tax charge for the year differs from the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19%. The differences are explained below:  

Profit before taxation

Notional taxation charge at corporation tax rate  
of  19.00% (2017: 19.25%)

Effects of: 

Tax effect of items not deductible for tax purposes1

Non-taxable gain on sale of subsidiary

Loss/(profit) on disposal of non-qualifying assets

Adjustments in respect of prior years

Derecognition of brought forward losses previously recognised

Utilisation of brought forward losses previously unrecognised

Effect of difference between closing deferred tax rate  
and current tax rate

Taxation charge and effective tax rate

2018
£’000

19,293

2018
%

2017
£’000

53,135

2017 
% 

3,666

19.00%

10,228

19.25% 

2,189

(111)

100

(981)

43

-

(131)

4,775

11.35%

(0.58%)

0.52%

(5.08%)

0.22%

-

(0.68%)

24.75%

630

(7,094)

(145)

160

-

(31)

48

3,796

1.19% 

(13.36%) 

(0.27%) 

0.30% 

- 

(0.06%) 

0.09% 

7.14% 

1 Expenses not deductible for tax purposes predominantly consist of depreciation charges on non-qualifying assets, the creation of capital losses, and non-deductible 

amortisation. 

The applicable corporation tax rate is calculated at 19% (2017: 19.25%) of the estimated taxable profit for the year. The standard 
rate of corporation tax reduced from 20% to 19% on 1 April 2017 and will reduce to 17% on 1 April 2020.  

The analysis of the Group’s effective tax rate between underlying and non-underlying activities is as follows: 

2018

2018
Non-
Underlying underlying
£’000

£’000

2017

2018

2017
Non- 
Total Underlying underlying
£’000
£’000
£’000

2017 

Total 
£’000 

Profit before taxation

Taxation

Effective tax rate

24,068

53,135 

(1,474)

3,796 

7.14% 

25,667

4,395

(6,374)

19,293

380

4,775

29,067

5,270

17.12%

(5.96%)

24.75%

18.13%

(6.12%)

105

 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

12. Taxation (continued) 

b) Reconciliation of  tax charge (continued) 

Non-recurring items 

The Group’s total effective tax rate for 2018 of 24.75% was influenced by the impairment of goodwill as well as by the non-taxable 
gain on disposal of Marshall Leasing Limited in the prior year and profit on disposal of freehold properties shielded from chargeable 
gains. The 2018 underlying effective tax rate of 17.12% is lower than the Group’s expected underlying effective tax rate due to 
the impact of substantial credits in respect of return to provision true-ups resulting from the filing in 2018 of retrospective capital 
allowances claims on the Group’s historic capital expenditure. Excluding the impact of these, the underlying effective tax rate 
would have been 21.6%. 

The prior year total effective tax rate of 7.14% was influenced by the significant non-taxable gain on disposal of a subsidiary, due 
to the chargeable gain falling within the substantial shareholding exemption. Excluding this item, the total effective tax rate for the 
year would have been 18.13%. 

c)

Factors affecting the taxation charge of  future years 

Future tax charges, and the Group’s effective tax rate, may be affected by factors such as acquisitions, disposals, restructuring 
and tax regime reforms. 

There have been no changes to the standard rate of corporation tax announced during either 2018 or 2017.  

In the budget of 16 March 2016, the Chancellor of the Exchequer announced a further 1.00% reduction to the standard rate of 
corporation tax which will be applicable in the financial year beginning 1 April 2020. The Finance Act 2016, which was substantively 
enacted when it received Royal Assent on 15 September 2016, reduced the corporation tax rate to 19.00% with effect from 1 April 
2017 decreasing to 17.00% with effect from 1 April 2020. These changes to the rate of corporation tax will impact the amount of 
future cash tax payments for which the Group will be responsible. 

106

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

13. Earnings per share 

Basic and diluted earnings per share are calculated by dividing the earnings attributable to equity shareholders by the weighted 
average number of ordinary shares during the year and the diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue in the 
year after taking account of the dilutive impact of shares under option of 2,423,249 at 31 December 2018 (2017: 2,866,231).  

Underlying earnings per share are based on basic earnings per share adjusted for the impact of non-underlying items. 

From continuing operations 

Underlying net profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

Non-underlying items after tax

Net profit attributable to equity holders of  the parent

From continuing and discontinued operations 

Underlying net profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

Non-underlying items after tax

Net profit attributable to equity holders of  the parent

Number of  shares 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purpose of basic EPS

Effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares: share options

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purpose of diluted EPS

From continuing operations

Basic underlying earnings per share

Basic earnings per share

Diluted underlying earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

From continuing and discontinued operations

Basic underlying earnings per share

Basic earnings per share

Diluted underlying earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

2018
2018
£’000
£’000

21,272 
21,272 

(7,343)
(7,343)

13,929 
13,929 

2018
2018
£’000
£’000

21,272 
21,272 

(6,754)
(6,754)

14,518 
14,518 

2017 
£’000 

20,807  

(11,309) 

9,498  

2017 
£’000 

23,797  

25,542  

49,339  

2018
2018
Thousands
Thousands

2017 
Thousands 

77,736 
77,736 

 2,584
 2,584 

80,320
80,320

2018
2018
pence
pence

27.4
27.4

17.9
17.9

26.5
26.5

17.3
17.3

27.4
27.4

18.7
18.7

26.5
26.5

18.1
18.1

77,393  

2,536  

79,929  

2017 
pence 

26.9 

12.3 

26.0 

11.9 

30.8 

63.8 

29.8 

61.7 

107

 
 
 
 
                                                                                                                                       
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

14. Dividends 

A final dividend of £3,309,000 (2016: £2,864,000) for the year ended 31 December 2017 was paid in May 2018. This represented 
a payment of 4.25p per ordinary share in issue at that time. 

An interim dividend in respect of the year ended 31 December 2018 of £1,674,000 (2017: £1,663,000), representing a payment 
of 2.15p per ordinary share in issue at that time, was paid in September 2018. 

A final dividend of 6.39p per share in respect of the year ended 31 December 2018 is to be proposed at the Annual General 
Meeting on 21 May 2019. The ex-dividend date will be 25 April 2019 and the associated record date will be 26 April 2019. This 
dividend will be paid subject to shareholder approval on 21 May 2019 and these financial statements do not reflect this final 
dividend payable. 

15. Goodwill and other intangible assets 

Cost 

At 1 January 2017

Additions

Additions on acquisition

Write-offs

Transfers from property, plant and equipment

At 31 December 2017

Additions

At 31 December 2018

Accumulated amortisation 

At 1 January 2017

Charge for the year

Disposals

At 31 December 2017

Charge for the year

Impairment

At 31 December 2018

Net book value 

At 31 December 2017

At 31 December 2018

Franchise
Goodwill agreements
£’000

£’000

Software
£’000

Favourable
leases
£’000

Order 
backlog
£’000

Total 
£’000 

49,076

72,115

- 

- 

(447)

- 

- 

22

- 

- 

48,629

72,137

- 

- 

48,629

72,137

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

9,302

9,302

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

48,629

39,327

72,137

72,137

1,079

235

- 

- 

57

1,371

260

1,631

376

247

- 

623

295

- 

918

748

713

172

769

123,211 

- 

- 

- 

172

- 

172

33

57

- 

90

57

- 

147

82

25

- 

- 

235 

22 

(769)

(1,216) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

57 

122,309 

260 

122,569 

769

- 

(769)

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1,178 

304 

(769) 

713 

352 

9,302 

10,367 

121,596 

112,202 

108

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

15. Goodwill and other intangible assets (continued) 

a) Disposals 

There were no disposals in 2018. 

In November 2017, the decision was made to close five franchised dealerships and one used car centre, which resulted in 
goodwill of £447,000 being written off.  

b)

Impairment testing 

For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill and franchise agreements are allocated to a cash generating unit (“CGU”), or to 
the smallest group of CGUs where it is not possible to apportion the goodwill or intangible assets at the individual CGU level. 
Each CGU or group of CGUs to which the goodwill is allocated represents the lowest level within the entity at which the goodwill 
is monitored for management purposes. Goodwill and intangible assets arising on business combinations are allocated to CGUs 
by determining which CGU is expected to benefit from the synergies of the business combination.  

The Group’s CGUs are groups of dealerships connected by manufacturer brand. The allocation of goodwill and indefinite life 
intangible assets to the CGU groups is as follows: 

VW Audi Group

BMW/MINI

Jaguar/Land Rover

Mercedes-Benz/Smart

Other

Total

Goodwill

Franchise  
Agreements 

£’000

15,523

1,461

8,003

11,182

3,158

39,327

£’000 

30,211 

8,345 

14,358 

19,201 

22 

72,137 

Goodwill impairment reviews are undertaken annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the 
carrying amount may not be recoverable and a potential impairment may be required. Impairment reviews have been performed 
for all groups of CGUs for the years ended 31 December 2018 and 2017. 

Valuation basis 

The recoverable amount of the Group’s CGUs is determined by reference to their value-in-use to perpetuity calculated using a 
discounted cash flow approach, with a pre-tax discount rate applied to the projected, risk-adjusted pre-tax cash flows and terminal 
value. Where higher, the fair value of groups of CGUs, less costs of disposal, is taken as the recoverable amount. The fair value 
amount is calculated by adding the net assets of each CGU to the estimated goodwill per CGU (budgeted EBITDA multiplied by 
a goodwill premium factor). The goodwill premium factor is estimated based on brand premiums paid by our market peers in 
recent acquisitions.  

109

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

15. Goodwill and other intangible assets (continued) 

b)

Impairment testing (continued) 

Period of  specific projected cash flows 

The  value-in-use  of  each  CGU  is  calculated  using  cash  flow  projections  for  a  five-year  period;  from  1  January  2019  to 
31 December 2023. These projections are based on the most recent budget which has been approved by the Board; the budget 
for the year ending 31 December 2019. The key assumptions in the most recent annual budget on which the cash flow projections 
are based relate to expectations of sales volumes and margins and expectations around changes in the operating cost base. 
The assumptions made are based on past experience, adjusted for expected changes, and external sources of information. The 
cash flows include ongoing capital expenditure required to maintain the Group’s dealership network, but exclude any growth 
capital expenditure projects to which the Group was not committed at the reporting date. 

Growth rates, ranging from -2% to 5% (2017: 5%) have been used to extrapolate cash flows for a further four years beyond 
budget, through to 31 December 2023. Growth rates for the BMW/Mini CGU have been used to extrapolate budgeted cash flows 
from 2021 onwards. These growth rates reflect the products and markets in which the relevant CGU, or groups of CGUs, operate. 
Growth rates are internal forecasts based on both internal and external market information. 

Discount rate 

The cash flow projections have been discounted using a rate derived from the Group’s pre-tax weighted average cost of capital 
adjusted for industry and market risk. The discount rate used is 10.5% (2017: 10.4%). 

Terminal growth rate 

The cash flows after the forecast period are extrapolated into the future over the useful economic life of the group of CGUs using 
a steady or declining growth rate that is consistent with that of the product and industry. These cash flows form the basis of what 
is referred to as the terminal value. The growth rate to perpetuity beyond the initial budgeted cash flows applied in the value-in-
use calculations to arrive at a terminal value is 2% (2017: 2%). Terminal growth rates are based on management’s estimate of 
future long-term average growth rates. 

Conclusion 

At 31 December 2018 the Group recorded impairment charges totalling £9,302,000; of which £8,388,000 is in respect of 
BMW/MINI and £914,000 is in respect of Nissan. The impairments recorded are a consequence of the continuing deterioration 
in market conditions in these brands, resulting in revised assumptions around future profitability and growth rates. The impairment 
charge is recorded within net operating expenses in non-underlying items in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive 
Income. 

Sensitivity to changes in key assumptions  

Impairment testing is dependent on estimates and judgements, particularly as they relate to the forecasting of future cash flows, 
the discount rates selected and expected long-term growth rates.  

The Group has performed a sensitivity analysis on the impairment tests using two scenarios; firstly, where the discount rate 
increases by 200 basis points, secondly, where cash flows in 2019 are based on a 1% decline in current year performance. 
Under both scenarios, all groups of CGUs not currently subject to impairment continue to have adequate headroom to support 
the carrying value of associated goodwill and other intangible assets. Both scenarios would increase impairment of the BMW/MINI 
CGU by 53% and 8% respectively. However, only the second scenario affects the recoverable value of the Other CGU, increasing 
the impairment by 46%. 

110

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

16. Property, plant and equipment 

                                                    Freehold 
                                                    and long                                                               Assets 
                                                   leasehold                                                              held for             Assets 
                                                     land and       Leasehold         Plant and           contract               under 
                                                    buildings   improvement       equipment               rental   construction                 Total 
                                                          £’000                £’000                £’000                £’000                £’000                £’000 
Cost 
At 1 January 2017                          108,487              15,015              35,126            101,944                7,022            267,594 
Additions at cost                                      47                   829                5,206              34,700              18,016              58,798 
Additions on acquisition                             -                        -                     32                        -                        -                     32 
Disposals                                          (2,485)                 (673)              (2,734)            (23,148)                       -             (29,040) 
Disposal of subsidiary                                -                    (42)                   (45)          (113,496)                       -           (113,583) 
Transfers                                          16,052                2,555                1,308                        -             (19,915)                       - 
Transfers to software                                 -                        -                  (349)                       -                        -                  (349) 
Transfers to assets held 
for sale                                                 (750)                       -                        -                        -                        -                  (750) 
At 31 December 2017                   121,351              17,684              38,544                        -                5,123            182,702 
Additions at cost                                 1,687                   523                3,410                        -              17,910              23,530 
Disposals                                             (205)              (1,040)              (5,277)                       -                        -               (6,522) 
Transfers                                            5,143                4,873                3,232                        -             (13,248)                       - 
Transfers to assets held 
for sale                                                 (797)                       -                        -                        -                        -                  (797) 
At 31 December 2018                   127,179              22,040              39,909                        -                9,785            198,913 

Accumulated depreciation and impairment 
At 1 January 2017                              8,996                3,383              21,146              32,258                        -              65,783 
Charge for the year                            1,434                1,913                5,570              15,962                        -              24,879 
Disposals                                               (53)                 (608)              (2,083)            (13,673)                       -             (16,417) 
Disposal of subsidiary                                -                    (42)                   (35)            (34,547)                       -             (34,624) 
Impairment                                            194                   332                   419                        -                        -                   945 
Transfers                                              (405)                  138                   267                        -                        -                        - 
Transfers to software                                 -                        -                  (292)                       -                        -                  (292) 
At 31 December 2017                     10,166                5,116              24,992                        -                        -              40,274 
Charge for the year                            1,718                1,802                5,455                        -                        -                8,975 
Disposals                                             (205)              (1,076)              (4,900)                       -                        -               (6,181) 
Impairment                                                 -                        -                     87                        -                        -                     87 
Transfers                                                    -                   324                  (324)                       -                        -                        - 
At 31 December 2018                     11,679                6,166              25,310                        -                        -              43,155 
Net book value 
At 31 December 2017                     111,185              12,568              13,552                        -                5,123            142,428 
At 31 December 2018                   115,500              15,874              14,599                        -                9,785            155,758 

As at 31 December 2018, the Group had capital commitments totalling £20.8m (2017: £7.7m) relating to ongoing construction 
projects. 

111

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

16. Property, plant and equipment (continued) 

2018 

Transfers to assets held for sale 

In October 2018, the Group ceased commercial activities at one if its freehold properties. As the property was no longer used for 
the commercial activity of the business and is actively being marketed for sale, the asset has been transferred to assets classified 
as held for sale (see Note 21 ‘Assets Classified as Held for Sale’). 

Impairments 

The impairment loss of £87,000 represents the net of £101,000 write-down of certain property, plant and equipment in the 
franchised dealership that closed in October 2018 and £14,000 impairment reversal of certain property, plant and equipment in 
a franchised dealership that closed in December 2017. This loss was recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive 
Income in net operating expenses. 

2017 

Transfers to software 

On integration of the Ridgeway businesses into the Group, certain items of software were identified in the tangible fixed assets 
records of the recently acquired businesses. These software assets have been reclassified from property, plant and equipment 
to intangible assets (see Note 15 ‘Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets’) consistent with the Group’s accounting policies. 

Transfers to assets held for sale 

In December 2017, the Group ceased commercial activities at one if its freehold properties. As the property was no longer used 
for the commercial activity of the business and is being marketed for sale, the asset has been written down to its fair value and 
transferred to assets classified as held for sale (see Note 21 ‘Assets Classified as Held for Sale’). 

Impairments 

The impairment loss of £787,000 represented the write-down of certain property, plant and equipment in the five franchised 
dealerships and one used car centre which closed in November 2017. This loss was recognised in the Consolidated Statement 
of Comprehensive Income in net operating expenses. 

17. Investment property 

Fair value at 1 January

Additions

Disposals

Fair value at 31 December

2018
£’000

2,590

5,800

(5,800)

2,590

2017 
£’000 

2,590 

- 

- 

2,590 

See Note 7 ‘Non-underlying items’ for details of additions and disposals in the year. 

Investment properties are stated at fair value; a formal valuation is carried out at least every three years by a Chartered Surveyor 
on an open market value basis. The most recent full valuation of investment properties was carried out as at 31 December 2016 
by Rapleys, Chartered Surveyors. The Group’s leasehold investment property was valued on a fair value basis as at 31 December 
2016 at £590,000 and the Group’s freehold investment property on a fair value basis as at 31 December 2016 at £2,000,000. 
A revaluation surplus of £670,000 was taken to the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income in 2016. 

No formal valuation was required as at 31 December 2018. The Directors assessed the valuation of property based on a desktop 
review which was carried out by Rapleys, Chartered Surveyors as at 13 November 2017; no indicators were identified which 
signalled a material change in the fair value of investment properties, and as such, investment properties continue to be held at 
their 31 December 2016 value. 

The properties are rented out to third parties. Rental income of £266,000 was recognised in 2018 (2017: £283,000). There are 
no restrictions on the Group’s ability to dispose of the investment properties or use any funds arising on disposal. There are no 
contractual commitments for further development of the investment properties. 

112

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

18. Inventories 

Stock held for resale

Less: Provisions

Inventories

2018
£’000

393,667

(9,662)

384,005

2017 
£’000 

410,423 

(9,163) 

401,260 

Stock held for resale include new and used vehicles held for resale, vehicle parts and other inventory. As at 31 December 2018 
£370,823,000 (2017: £380,641,000) of finished goods are held under vehicle financing arrangements (see Note 22 ‘Trade and 
Other Payables’). 

Inventory recognised in cost of sales during the year as an expense was £1,895 million (2017: £1,943 million). 

19. Trade and other receivables 

Amounts falling due within one year: 

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Amounts due from related undertakings (note 31)

Prepayments

Trade and other receivables

2018
£’000

42,644

29,235

26

7,777

79,682

2017 
£’000 

51,669 

31,613 

- 

8,859 

92,141 

More information in respect of principal risk management is provided in Note 26 ‘Financial Instruments – Risk Management’. 

All financial assets included within trade and other receivables are held at amortised cost. The carrying amount of trade and 
other receivables approximates fair value. 

Other receivables include accrued supplier income of £11,940,000 (2017: £17,102,000). 

20. Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash at bank and in hand

2018
£’000

1,174

2017 
£’000 

4,867 

Cash and cash equivalents are held at amortised cost. Fair value approximates carrying value. 

Cash at bank earns interest at floating interest rates determined by reference to short-term benchmark rates. 

21. Assets classified as held for sale 

Non-current assets held for sale 

Freehold land and buildings 

At 1 January

Transfers from property, plant and equipment

Disposals

At 31 December

113

2018
£’000

2017 
£’000 

750

797

(750)

797

 - 

750 

 - 

750 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

21. Assets classified as held for sale (continued) 

2018 

Following the closure of one of the Group’s dealerships in October 2018, the decision was taken to sell the freehold property 
owned by the Group and used by the dealership. Based on current market conditions, the sale is expected to be completed 
within one year from the balance sheet date. As a result, the freehold property has been reclassified as held for sale and transferred 
from property, plant and equipment into current assets. On reclassification, the freehold property was measured at the lower of 
its carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell at the date of reclassification (fair value as determined by a desktop valuation 
from Chartered Surveyors). No impairment was required as fair value less costs to sell exceed the asset’s carrying value. 

Profits on disposal of assets classified as held for sale are included in Note 7 ‘Non-Underlying Items’. 

2017 

Following the closure of the one of the Group’s dealerships in December 2017, the decision was taken to sell the freehold property 
owned by the Group and used by the dealership. Based on current market conditions, the sale is expected to be completed 
within one year from the balance sheet date. As a result, the freehold property has been reclassified as held for sale and transferred 
from property, plant and equipment into current assets. On reclassification, the freehold property was measured at the lower of 
its carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell at the date of reclassification (fair value as determined by a desktop valuation 
from Chartered Surveyors). This remeasurement resulted in an impairment loss of £194,000 being recognised in the Consolidated 
Statement of Comprehensive Income. 

The asset is presented within total assets of the prior year Retail segment in Note 5 ‘Segmental Information’. 

22. Trade and other payables 

Current – trade and other payables 

Trade payables: 

– vehicle financing arrangements

– other trade payables

Contract liabilities

Amounts owed to related undertakings (note 31)

Other tax and social security payable

Other payables

Accruals

Total current trade and other payables

Non-current – other payables 

Accruals

Total non-current other payables

2018
£’000

2017 
£’000 

370,823

81,749

18,165

37

4,443

1,658

16,984

493,859

380,641 

89,281 

21,478 

149 

4,500 

8,205 

23,360 

527,614 

5,596

5,596

4,281 

4,281 

All financial liabilities included within current trade and other payables are held at amortised cost; carrying value is a reasonable 
approximation of fair value. 

Vehicle financing arrangements 

The Group finances the purchases of new and used vehicle inventories using vehicle funding facilities’ provided by various lenders 
including the captive finance companies associated with brand partners. These finance arrangements generally have a maturity 
of 90 days or less and the Group is normally required to repay amounts outstanding on the earlier of the sale of the vehicles that 
have been funded under the facilities or the stated maturity date. 

114

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

22. Trade and other payables (continued) 

Vehicle financing arrangements (continued) 

Amounts due to finance companies in respect of vehicle funding are included within trade payables and disclosed under vehicle 
financing arrangements. Related cash flows are reporting within cash flows from operating activities within the consolidated 
statement of cash flows. 

Vehicle financing facilities are subject to LIBOR-based (or similar) interest rates. The interest incurred under these agreements 
is included within finance costs and classified as stock holding interest. 

Contract liabilities 

Contract liabilities include commission income received in advance from the various finance and insurance companies for which 
the Group acts as agent. 

In 2018 the Group recognised revenue of £9,863,000 (2017: £11,528,000) that was held in contract liabilities as at 1 January 2018. 

23. Loans and borrowings 

Current loans and borrowings 

Mortgages

Non-current loans and borrowings 

Mortgages

Total loans and borrowings

2018
Nominal and
book value
£’000

2017 
Nominal and 
book value 
£’000 

641

641

5,665

5,665

6,306

642 

642 

6,466 

6,466 

7,108 

Mortgages comprise amounts borrowed from commercial financial institutions and are secured by fixed charges over specified 
property assets of certain subsidiaries of the Group. 

Committed facilities 

The Group has a revolving credit facility of £120,000,000 of which £nil was drawn at 31 December 2018 (2017: £nil). This facility 
includes  access  to  an  overdraft  facility  of  £25,000,000.  This  facility  is  available  for  general  corporate  purposes  including 
acquisitions or working capital requirements. The facility is held in a cash pooling arrangement and balances have been offset in 
the Consolidated Balance Sheet. 

The facility is secured by cross guarantees granted by the certain members of the Group. The facility is available until May 2021. 

More information in respect of principal risk management is provided in Note 26 ‘Financial Instruments – Risk Management’. 

The carrying amount of current loans and borrowings approximate fair value. 

The carrying amounts and fair value of the non-current loans and borrowings are as below. The fair values are based on cash 
flows discounted using the prevailing rates. 

Mortgages

2018
Fair
value
£’000

4,478

Carrying
amount
£’000

6,466

2017 
Fair 
value 
£’000 

4,917 

Carrying
amount
£’000

5,665

115

 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

23. Loans and borrowings (continued) 

a)

Interest rate profile of  borrowings 

Mortgages

Weighted average cost of  drawn borrowings

2018

Debt
£’000

6,306

6,306

2018
Average
effective
interest rate

2.40

2.40

2017

Debt
£’000

7,108

7,108

2017 
Average 
effective 
interest rate 

1.63 

1.63 

All loans and borrowings are subject to floating rates of interest which are determined by reference to official market rates such 
as LIBOR or the Finance House Base Rate. 

b) Maturity profile of  borrowings 

The Group’s borrowings have the following maturity profile: 

6 months or less

6 – 12 months

1 – 5 years

Over 5 years

Total loans and borrowings

24. Provisions 

2018
£’000

321

321

2,565

3,099

6,306

2017 
£’000 

321 

321 

2,565 

3,901 

7,108 

At 1 January 2018

Transfer from accruals

Charged to income statement in the year

Reversed and credited to income 

statement in the year

Utilised during the year

Other
£’000

200

390

778

-

-

As at 31 December 2018

1,368

Pension
£’000

6,000

-

-

-

Tax
£’000

237

-

-

-

(420)

5,580

(237)

-

Closed

sites Dilapidations
£’000
£’000

Vacant 
property
£’000

Total 
£’000 

527

-

35

(135)

(328)

99

1,053

4,813

12,830 

140

385

(818)

(117)

643

-

147

530 

1,345 

(3,581)

(1,143)

236

(4,534) 

(2,245) 

7,926 

The reversed and credited to income statement in the year total includes £4,160,000 of non-underlying items included in Note 7 
‘Non-underlying items’. 

Provisions have been allocated between current and non-current as below. 

Current

Non-current

Total provisions

2018
£’000

7,926

-

7,926

2017 
£’000 

8,815 

4,015 

12,830 

116

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

24. Provisions (continued) 

Tax 

On acquisition of Pentagon Limited and Ridgeway Garages (Newbury) Limited during the year ended 31 December 2016, the 
Group inherited a potential settlement in respect of various film tax planning initiatives previously entered into pre-acquisition. 
The estimated settlement was provided for as at 31 December 2016. In February 2017 a settlement with HMRC was agreed 
with most instalments paid during the year; the final instalment was paid in January 2018. 

Closed sites, dilapidations and vacant property 

The Group manages its portfolio carefully and either closes or sells sites which no longer fit with the Group’s strategy. When sites 
are closed or sold provisions are made for any residual costs or commitments. 

The Group operates from a number of leasehold premises under full repairing leases. The provision recognises that repairs are 
required to put the buildings back into the state of repair required under the leases. 

Where property commitments exist at sites which are closed or closing the Group provides for the unavoidable cost of those 
leases post closure. The £4,534,0000 release of unutilised provision in the year resulted from the better than expected exit from 
lease commitments on premises no longer used by the Group. 

Pension 

See Note 32 ‘Pensions’ for full details of the circumstances giving rise to the recognition of this provision. The provision was 
utilised on 25 February 2019. 

Other 

Other provisions include an amount of £301,000 in respect of the Group’s estimated financial exposure under open insurance 
claims. The claims are generally expected to be concluded within the next year. 

Other provisions also include an allowance of £814,000 for potential output VAT payable arising from uncertain VAT treatment of 
specific vehicle purchases. The conclusion of this open position is not expected in the forthcoming year. 

25. Deferred tax assets and liabilities 

The analysis of deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities is as below. 

Deferred tax assets: 

 – Deferred tax asset

Deferred tax liabilities: 

– Deferred tax liability to be recovered after more than 12 months (note 25a)

– Deferred tax assets to be offset against liabilities (note 25b)

Net Deferred tax liabilities

The gross movement on the deferred tax account is as follows: 

At 1 January

Transitional adjustment on adoption of IFRS 9

Disposal of subsidiaries

Income statement charge (note 12)

At 31 December

117

2018
£’000

2017 
£’000 

-

39 

(22,202)

1,415

(20,787)

(20,787)

(22,234) 

1,786 

(20,448) 

(20,409) 

2018
£’000

2017 
£’000 

(20,409)

(20,767) 

15

-

(393)

- 

(1,547) 

1,905 

(20,787)

(20,409) 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

25. Deferred tax assets and liabilities (continued) 

a) Deferred tax liabilities 

The movement in deferred tax liabilities during the year, without taking into consideration the offsetting of balances within the 
same tax jurisdiction, is as follows: 

                                                                                   Fixed assets                                 Assets 
                                                         Accelerated   acquired on a                           previously                                                                    
                                                                        tax           business      Roll over       qualifying    Investment     Intangible                        
                                                        depreciation     combination            relief          for IBAs     properties           assets         Goodwill
                                                                    £’000                  £’000            £’000               £’000             £’000             £’000               £’000

Total 
£’000 

Deferred tax liabilities 

At 1 January 2017                                         -                6,800           1,206                303               164         12,283             1,564 22,320 

Charged/(credited) to the 

income statement – current year                  80                  (710)               (3)                (81)                 (8)                (8)               179

(551) 

Charged/(credited) to the 

income statement – prior year                        5                   235                  -                     -                (71)                  -               (367)

(198) 

Transfers to deferred tax asset                  720                        -                  -                     -                (57)                  -                     -

663 

At 31 December 2017                               805                6,325           1,203                222                 28         12,275             1,376 22,234 

Charged/(credited) to the 

income statement – current year                609                  (189)                 -                 (26)                   -               (11)               177

560 

Charged/(credited) to the 

income statement – prior year                  (172)                 (482)              51                     -                    -                  4                    7

(592) 

At 31 December 2018                            1,242                5,654           1,254                196                 28         12,268             1,560 22,202 

b)     Deferred tax assets 

The movement in deferred tax assets during the year, without taking into consideration the offsetting of balances within the same 
tax jurisdiction, is as follows: 

                                                         Accelerated                                    Share-                                                   Disposals              Other 
                                                                        tax                     Tax           based     Investment          Capital      on a sale      temporary
                                                        depreciation                losses    payments      properties           losses             basis     differences
                                                                    £’000                  £’000            £’000               £’000             £’000             £’000               £’000

Total 
£’000 

Deferred tax assets 

At 1 January 2017                                    887                     36              268                  57               116                   -                189

1,553 

(Charged)/credited to the 

income statement – current year                  41                       2                  -                     -                   3                42             1,376

1,464 

(Charged)/credited to the 

income statement – prior year                  (103)                      1            (268)                    -                 44                   -                  18

(308) 

Transfers from deferred 

tax liability                                                   720                        -                  -                 (57)                   -                   -                     -

663 

Disposal of subsidiaries                         (1,545)                       -                  -                     -                    -                   -                   (2) (1,547) 

At 31 December 2017                                    -                     39                  -                     -               163                42             1,581

1,825 

Transitional adjustment IFRS 9                       -                        -                  -                     -                    -                   -                  15

15 

(Charged)/credited to the 

income statement – current year                    -                    (43)                 -                     -               207              167               (421)

(90) 

(Charged)/credited to the 

income statement – prior year                        -                       4                  -                     -                  (2)                  -               (337)

(335) 

At 31 December 2018                                    -                        -                  -                     -               368              209                838

1,415 

118

 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

25. Deferred tax assets and liabilities (continued) 

b) Deferred tax assets (continued) 

Deferred tax assets are recognised for tax loss carry forwards to the extent that the realisation of the related tax benefit through 
future taxable profits is probable. 

Trading losses 

Available indefinitely

At 31 December

2018

Tax losses
£’000

2018
Unrecognised
deferred
tax asset
£’000

2017

Tax losses
£’000

2017 
Unrecognised 
deferred 
tax asset 
£’000 

1,387

1,387

236

236

1,133

1,133

192 

192 

26. Financial instruments – risk management 

a)

Financial instruments by category 

The Group’s principal financial instruments consist of cash and cash equivalents, bank overdrafts and loans and borrowings. 
The main purpose of these financial instruments is to manage the Group’s funding and liquidity requirements. The Group has 
other financial assets and liabilities such as trade receivables and trade payables, which arise directly from its operations. 

The table below analyses financial instruments by type. In 2018, all financial assets are carried at amortised cost (2017: loans 
and receivables (amortised cost). All financial liabilities are carried at amortised cost in both 2018 and 2017. For all financial 
assets and liabilities, fair value equals carrying value except for long-term borrowings as disclosed in Note 23. 

Assets as per the Consolidated Balance Sheet 

Trade and other receivables excluding prepayments (note 19)

Cash and cash equivalents (note 20)

Total financial assets

Liabilities as per the Consolidated Balance Sheet 

Loans and borrowings (note 23)

Trade and other payables excluding non-financial liabilities (note 22)

Total financial liabilities

b) Risk management 

The Group’s activities expose it to the following financial risks: 

• Market risk; 
•
•

Credit risk; and 
Liquidity risk. 

2018
£’000

71,905

1,174

73,079

2017 
£’000 

83,282 

4,867 

88,149 

6,306

495,012

501,318

7,108 

527,395 

534,503 

Each of these risks are managed in accordance with Board-approved policies. Risk management policies and systems have 
been established and are reviewed regularly to reflect changes in market conditions and the Group’s activities. These policies 
are set out below. 

The Group’s financial risk management processes seek to enable the early identification, evaluation and effective management 
of the significant risks facing the business. 

119

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

26. Financial instruments – risk management (continued) 

b) Risk management (continued) 

The Group does not use financial derivatives and does not enter into trade financial instruments, including derivative financial 
instruments, for speculative purposes. 

Market risk 

Market risk is the risk of movements in the fair value of future cash flows of a financial instrument or forecast transaction as 
underlying market prices change. The only market risk to which the Group is exposed is changes in interest rates. The Group’s 
business activities neither expose it to commodity price risk nor foreign currency risk. 

Interest rate risk is the risk that a change in interest rates adversely effects the Group’s performance or ability to settle financial 
obligations and comprises two elements. 

Interest price risk 

This risk results from financial instruments bearing fixed interest rates; changes in floating interest rates affect the fair value of 
these fixed rate financial instruments. 

The Group has no debt subject to fixed interest rates and is, therefore, not exposed to interest price risk. 

Interest cash flow risk 

This risk results from financial instruments bearing floating interest rates. Changes in floating interest rates affect cash flows on 
interest receivable or payable. 

The Group is exposed to interest rate risk on its floating rate debt, namely all loans and borrowings. The interest rate exposure 
of the Group is managed within the constraints of the Group’s business plan and the financial covenants under its facilities. Due 
to the low value of the Group’s loans and borrowings as at 31 December 2018, the Group does not have significant sensitivities 
to the impact of future changes in interest rates on floating rate debt. 

Credit risk 

Credit risk refers to the risk that a counterparty will default on its contractual obligations resulting in financial loss to the Group. 

The Group is exposed to credit risk on its financial assets which consist of cash balances with banks and trade and other 
receivables to the extent that settlement is cash-related. The Group does not have a significant exposure to this type of financial 
risk due to the nature of its customer base and the types of transaction that are undertaken. 

The maximum exposure to credit risk on the Group’s financial assets is represented by the assets’ carrying amount. 

120

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

26. Financial instruments – risk management (continued) 

b) Risk management (continued) 

Credit risk (continued) 

Exposure to credit risk 

A summary of the Group’s exposure to credit risk for trade receivables and cash and cash equivalents is as follows: 

Counterparties without external credit rating: 

Group 1

Group 2

Total gross carrying amount

Loss allowance

Net carrying amount of  trade receivables

Counterparties with external credit rating: 

A \ AA- (stable)*

Loss allowance

Cash at bank

2018
£’000
Not credit-
impaired

2018
£’000
Credit- 
impaired 

1,338

41,983

43,321

(677)

42,644

1,174

-

1,174

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2017 
£’000 

1,587 

51,026 

52,613 

(944) 

51,669 

4,867 

- 

4,867 

Group 1 – new customers/related parties (less than 6 months) 

Group 2 – existing customers/related parties (more than 6 months) and no defaults in the past. 

* Standard & Poor’s rating (long term) 

Trade receivables 

The Group has a high volume of transactions spread across a large customer base, therefore, does not have a significant 
exposure to the credit worthiness of any single counterparty. 

The Group has an established credit policy applied by each business under which the credit status of each new customer is 
reviewed (by reference to external credit evaluations, where possible) before credit is advanced. Credit limits are established for 
all significant or high-risk customers, which represent the maximum amount permitted to be outstanding without requiring additional 
approval from the appropriate level of management. These limits are based on external credit reference agency ratings and the 
utilisation of approved credit limits is regularly monitored. Outstanding debts are continually monitored by each business unit. 

Trade receivables are considered to be past due once they have passed their contractual due date. At each reporting date, the 
Group uses a provision matrix to measure expected credit losses on trade receivables. When the debt is deemed irrecoverable, 
the allowance account is written off against the underlying receivable. 

Credit quality of  trade receivables – expected credit loss assessment at 1 January 2018 and 31 December 2018 

The Group uses a provision matrix to measure the expected credit losses on trade receivables. Loss rates are calculated using 
a ‘roll rate’ method based on the probability of a receivable progressing through successive stages of delinquency to write-off. 
Loss rates are based on actual credit loss experience over the past two years. 

121

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

26. Financial instruments – risk management (continued) 

b) Risk management (continued) 

Credit risk (continued) 

Credit quality of  trade receivables – expected credit loss assessment at 1 January 2018 and 31 December 2018 (continued) 

The movement in the allowance for impairment in respect of trade and other receivables during the year was as follows: 

Balance at 1 January per IAS 39

Adjustment on initial application of IFRS 9

Balance at 1 January per IFRS 9 (2018)/IAS 39 (2017)

Amounts written off

Net remeasurement of loss allowances

Balance at 31 December per IFRS 9 (2018)/IAS 39 (2017)

Cash and cash equivalents 

2018
£’000

1,542

91

1,633

(736)

(220)

677

2017 
£’000 

1,944 

- 

1,944 

(214) 

(188) 

1,542 

Banking relationships are generally limited to those banks that are members of the core relationship group. These banks are 
selected for their credit status and their ability to meet the businesses’ day-to-day banking requirements. The credit ratings of 
these institutions are monitored on a continuing basis. 

The Group has not recorded impairments against cash or cash equivalents, nor have any recoverability issues been identified 
with such balances. Such items are typically recoverable on demand or in line with normal banking arrangements. 

Liquidity risk 

Liquidity risk is the risk that the group will encounter difficulty in meeting its obligations associated with its financial liabilities as 
they fall due. 

Ultimate responsibility for liquidity risk management rests with the Board, which has built an appropriate liquidity risk management 
framework for the management of the Group’s short, medium and long-term funding and liquidity management requirements. 

Liquidity risk is managed by maintaining adequate levels of easily accessible cash reserves and committed banking facilities. To 
assess the adequacy of resources, available headroom is continuously monitored through review of forecast and actual cash 
flows and through matching the maturity profiles of financial assets and liabilities. The Group has access to undrawn banking 
facilities in order to further reduce liquidity risk. The Group does not anticipate any issues drawing on the committed, undrawn 
banking facilities should this be necessary. Full details of the Group’s borrowing facilities are given in Note 23 ‘Loans and 
Borrowings’. 

122

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

26. Financial instruments – risk management (continued) 

b) Risk management (continued) 

Liquidity risk (continued) 

The table below analyses the contractual undiscounted cash flows relating to the Group’s financial liabilities at the balance sheet 
date. The cash flows are grouped based on the remaining period to the contractual maturity date. The Group holds sufficient 
funds to meet these commitments as they fall due. 

Due within

Due
between
6 months
6 months and 1 year
£’000

£’000

Mortgages

Trade and other payables 
(excluding other taxes and social security)

At 31 December 2018

379

489,416

489,795

376

-

376

Due within

Due
between
6 months
6 months and 1 year
£’000

£’000

Mortgages

Trade and other payables 
(excluding other taxes and social security)

At 31 December 2017

385

523,114

523,499

382

-

382

Due
between
1 and 2
years
£’000

Due 
between 

2 and 5  Due after 
5 years
£’000

years
£’000

741

2,150

3,396

Total 
£’000 

7,042 

5,596

6,337

Due
between
1 and 2
years
£’000

-

-

495,012 

2,150

3,396

502,054 

Due 
between 

2 and 5  Due after 
5 years
£’000

years
£’000

753

2,187

4,099

Total 
£’000 

7,806 

4,281

5,034

-

-

527,395 

2,187

4,099

535,201 

The above tables do not include forecast data for liabilities which may be incurred in the future but which were not contracted as 
at the balance sheet date. 

Capital risk management 

The capital structure of the Group consists of cash and cash equivalents, loans and borrowings and shareholders’ equity. The 
consolidated statement of changes in equity provides details on equity, Note 20 provides details of cash and cash equivalents 
and Note 23 provides details of loans and borrowings. 

The Group manages its capital structure with the following objectives: 

•

•

•
•

to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern and maintain sufficient available resources as protection for 
unforeseen events; 
to ensure that sufficient capital resources are available for working capital requirements and meeting principal and interest 
payment obligations as they fall due; 
to provide flexibility of resource for strategic growth and investment where opportunities arise; and 
to provide reasonable returns to shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders whilst maintaining a limited level of risk. 

There were no changes to the Group’s approach to capital management during the year. 

By virtue of the Group’s retail mediation activities, the Group is subject to the capital requirements imposed by the Financial 
Conduct Authority on all non-investment insurance intermediaries. The Group’s capital adequacy is monitored on a quarterly 
basis and its capital resources have been consistently in excess of the requirements. 

123

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

26. Financial instruments – risk management (continued) 

b) Risk management (continued) 

Capital risk management (continued) 

The Directors monitor the Group’s capital structure and determine the level of dividends payable to shareholders at least twice 
a year prior to the announcement of results, taking into account the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern and the capital 
requirements of its strategic business plans. Consistent with others in the industry, the Directors monitor levels of leverage by 
reference to the ratio of net debt to total shareholders’ equity. Net debt is calculated as total borrowings (including both current 
and non-current borrowings) less cash and cash equivalents. As disclosed in the Net Debt Reconciliation on page 76, the Group 
had net debt of £5,131,000 as at 31 December 2018 (2017: £2,241,000). 

27. Fair value measurement 

The following table provides the fair value measurement hierarchy of the Group’s assets and liabilities. 

                                                                                                                                Fair value measurement using: 

                                                             Date of  valuation

Assets measured at fair value: 

Investment properties (note 17)          31 December 2018

Assets held for sale (note 21)             31 December 2018

Total
£’000

2,590

797

Liabilities for which fair values are disclosed: 

Mortgages (note 23)                            31 December 2018

4,478

Assets measured at fair value: 

Investment properties (note 17)          31 December 2017

Assets held for sale (note 21)             31 December 2017

2,590

750

Liabilities for which fair values are disclosed: 

Mortgages (note 23)                            31 December 2017

4,917

There were no transfers between Level 1 and 2 during 2018 or 2017. 

Quoted prices
in active
markets
(Level 1)
£’000

Significant 
Significant
observable unobservable 
inputs 
(Level 3) 
£’000 

inputs
(Level 2)
£’000

-

-

-

-

-

-

2,590

797

4,478

2,590

750

4,917

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

124

                                                                                          
                                                                                          
                                                                                          
                                                                                          
 
 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

28. Share capital and reserves 

Share capital and share premium 

At 1 January 2017

At 31 December 2017

Issued 11 April 2018

At 31 December 2018

Number
of  shares

77,392,862

77,392,862

472,791

77,865,653

Ordinary
shares
£’000

49,531

49,531

303

49,834

Share 
premium
£’000

19,672

19,672

-

19,672

Total 
£’000 

69,203 

69,203 

303 

69,506 

On 11 April 2018 472,791 ordinary shares of 64p each were issued as part of the exercise of share options awarded under the 
IPO Restricted and IPO Performance share option schemes. There were no shares issued in 2017. 

All shares issued are fully paid. 

Details of Directors’ interests in shares are shown in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 53 to 60. 

Share repurchases 

In April 2018 the Employee Benefit Trust (controlled by the Company) subscribed to 472,791 ordinary shares of the Company as 
part of the aforementioned exercise of share options. The Trust subscribed to the shares at nominal value. No ordinary shares 
were repurchased by the Company in 2017. 

Shares held by subsidiaries 

No shares in the Company were held by subsidiaries in 2018 (2017: nil). 

Share-based payments reserve 

The share-based payments reserve is used to recognise the value of equity-settled share-based payments granted to employees, 
including key management personnel, and Directors of the Group as part of their remuneration. Refer to Note 29 ‘Share-Based 
Payments’ for further details of these plans. 

Own shares reserve 

Represents shares in the Company held by the Marshall Motor Holdings Employee Benefit Trust. These shares are held in order 
to satisfy options exercised under the Group’s Performance Share Plan. Further details of which are set out in Note 29 ‘Share-
Based Payments’. 

29. Share-based payments 

The Group operates an equity-settled share option scheme for certain senior managers and executive directors of the Group 
(“the Performance Share Plan”). As at 31 December 2018, five share grants have been awarded under the scheme being (a) 
IPO Restricted Awards (vesting in three tranches), (b) IPO Performance Awards (vesting in two tranches), (c) 2016 Performance 
Awards, (d) 2017 Performance Awards and (e) 2018 Performance Awards. Awards are made annually to eligible employees at 
the discretion of the Remuneration Committee; employees receive shares at the end of the performance period, subject to the 
achievement of the specified underlying basic earnings per share (“EPS”) performance conditions. Performance conditions are 
designed to incentivise senior managers and executive directors to maximise long-term shareholder returns. Each option grant 
under the scheme is disclosed separately below. 

The total share-based payment charge recognised during the year ended 31 December 2018 was £732,000 (2017: £1,005,000). 
This is split as £203,000 (2017: £266,000) in accruals and £529,000 (2017: £739,000) in share-based payment reserve. 

If an option remains unexercised after a period of ten years from the date of grant, the option expires. The weighted average 
remaining contractual life of options outstanding as at 31 December 2018 is 8.1 years (2017: 8.2 years). 

125

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

29. Share-based payments (continued) 

The fair value of share options is determined by reference to the market value of the Group’s shares at the date of grant. No 
valuation model is required to calculate the fair value of awards on the basis that the employees receiving the awards are entitled 
to receive the full value of the shares and there are no market-based performance conditions attached to the awards. The weighted 
average fair value of options outstanding as at 31 December 2018 is £1.68 (2017: £1.65). The fair value of options granted during 
the  year  was  £1.59  (2017:  £1.69). The  fair  value  of  equity  settled  share  options  granted  was  based  on  market  value  on 
17 April 2018 when the share options were granted. 

Options are ordinarily forfeited if the employee leaves the Group before the options vest. 

All options issued are nil cost options and all awards have an exercise price of £nil. 

The share option scheme is in place to encourage option holders to take appropriate and timely action to maximise the long-term 
financial performance and success of the Group. As a result, in accordance with the discretion afforded to them under the Group’s 
remuneration policy, the Remuneration Committee regularly reviews any impact of Group restructurings and reorganisations on 
incentive outcomes to ensure that performance conditions are not distorted by action taken to optimise business performance 
for the long-term benefit of the Group. 

The Remuneration Committee exercised this discretion during 2017. Incentive outcomes on the IPO Performance Awards and 
the 2016 Performance Awards were adjusted for the impact of the disposal of Marshall Leasing Limited. 

In April 2018, the third tranche of the IPO Restricted Share Awards as well as the first tranche of the IPO Performance Awards 
vested and became exercisable. On 11 April 2018, all option holders exercised these options as well as the second tranche of 
the IPO Restricted Awards which had previously vested and become exercisable in 2017. As such, 472,791 ordinary shares of 
64p were issued to satisfy the exercise of options. On exercise, the Remuneration Committee exercised its discretion to settle a 
proportion of the share options equal to the option holders’ tax liability arising on exercise in cash rather than being cash settled. 
The total value of cash-settled transactions was £968,000. 

As at 31 December 2018 outstanding share options were as follows: 

Award                                                                 Award date

IPO Performance Awards – Tranche 2               2 April 2015

2016 Performance Awards                              13 June 2016

2017 Performance Awards                     29 September 2017

2018 Performance Awards                               17 April 2018

No of  shares 
over which
options are
outstanding

Exercise
price

Date 
from which
exercisable

Expiry 
date 

578,856

493,575

619,763

731,054

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

2 April 2019

2 April 2025 

13 June 2019

13 June 2026 

29 September 2020

29 September 2027 

17 April 2021

17 April 2028 

126

                                                                                              
                                                                                              
                                                                                              
Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

29. Share-based payments (continued) 

a)

IPO Restricted Awards 

The IPO Restricted Share Awards were not subject to any performance conditions; vesting was purely subject to the service 
condition of continuous employment. 

These options vested in three equal tranches and became exercisable on the first, second and third anniversaries of the date on 
which the Company’s shares were admitted to trading on the Alternative Investment Market of the London Stock Exchange 
(2 April 2015). 

IPO Restricted Share Awards 

Outstanding as at 1 January

Granted during the year

Forfeited during the year

Exercised

Expired during the year

Outstanding as at 31 December

Exercisable as at 31 December

b)

IPO Performance Awards 

2018
No.

2018
WAEP

2017
No.

2017 
WAEP 

313,199

-

-

(313,199)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

313,199

-

-

-

-

313,199

156,599

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

The IPO Performance Awards are subject to non-market performance conditions as detailed below as well as the service condition 
of continuous employment. 

The options vest for achieving growth in EPS from 2014 to 2017; 25% vest for achieving growth of CPI plus 4% per annum 
increasing to 100% vesting for achieving growth of CPI plus 10% per annum. 

These options vest in two equal tranches and 50% become exercisable on the third anniversary of the date on which the 
Company’s shares were admitted to trading on the Alternative Investment Market of the London Stock Exchange and the 
remaining 50% become exercisable on the fourth anniversary. 

IPO Performance Awards 

Outstanding as at 1 January

Granted during the year

Forfeited during the year

Exercised

Expired during the year

Outstanding as at 31 December

Exercisable as at 31 December

2018
No.

2018
WAEP

2017
No.

2017 
WAEP 

1,208,056

-

(50,341)

(578,859)

-

578,856

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1,406,040

-

(197,984)

-

-

1,208,056

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

127

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

29. Share-based payments (continued) 

c)

2016 Performance Awards 

The 2016 Performance Awards are subject to non-market performance conditions as detailed below as well as the service 
condition of continuous employment. 

The options vest for achieving growth in EPS from 2015 to 2018; 25% vest for achieving growth of CPI plus 3% per annum 
increasing to 100% vesting for achieving growth of CPI plus 8% per annum. 

These options all become exercisable on the third anniversary of the grant date. 

The 2016 Performance Awards are subject to a holding period which starts on the grant date and ends on the fourth anniversary 
of the grant date. 

2016 Performance Awards 

Outstanding as at 1 January

Granted during the year

Forfeited during the year

Exercised

Expired during the year

Outstanding as at 31 December

Exercisable as at 31 December

d)

2017 Performance Awards 

2018
No.

2018
WAEP

2017
No.

2017 
WAEP 

538,835

-

(45,260)

-

-

493,575

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

660,801

-

(121,966)

-

-

538,835

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

The 2017 Performance Awards are subject to non-market performance conditions as detailed below as well as the service 
condition of continuous employment. 

The options vest for achieving growth in underlying, basic EPS from 2017 to 2019; 25% vest for achieving growth of CPI plus 1% 
per annum and the percentage of options which vests increases on a straight line basis up to 100% vesting for achieving growth 
of CPI plus 5% per annum. 

These options all become exercisable on the third anniversary of the grant date. 

The 2017 Performance Awards are subject to a holding period which starts on the grant date and ends on the fourth anniversary 
of the grant date. 

2018
No.

2018
WAEP

2017
No.

2017 
WAEP 

2017 Performance Awards 

Outstanding as at 1 January

Granted during the year

Forfeited during the year

Exercised

Expired during the year

Outstanding as at 31 December

Exercisable as at 31 December

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

806,141

-

-

-

806,141

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

806,141

-

(186,378)

-

-

619,763

-

128

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

29. Share-based payments (continued) 

e)

2018 Performance Awards 

The 2018 Performance Awards are subject to non-market performance conditions as detailed below as well as the service 
condition of continuous employment. 

The options vest for achieving growth in underlying, basic EPS from 2017 to 2020; 25% vest for achieving growth of 1.3% per 
annum and the percentage of options which vests increases on a straight line basis up to 100% vesting for achieving growth of 
6% or more per annum. 

These options all become exercisable on the third anniversary of the grant date. 

The 2018 Performance Awards are subject to a holding period which starts on the grant date and ends on the fourth anniversary 
of the grant date. 

2018 Performance Awards 

Outstanding as at 1 January

Granted during the year

Forfeited during the year

Exercised

Expired during the year

Outstanding as at 31 December

Exercisable as at 31 December

2018
No.

2018
WAEP

2017
No.

2017 
WAEP 

-

930,966

(199,912)

-

-

731,054

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

30. Commitments and contingencies 

Operating lease commitments – Group as lessee 

The  Group,  as  lessee,  has  non-cancellable  operating  lease  agreements. The  lease  terms  vary  and  the  majority  of  lease 
agreements are renewable at the end of the lease period at market rate. 

The lease expenditure charged to the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income during the year is disclosed in Note 6 
‘Profit before Taxation’. 

The future aggregate minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases are set out below. 

                                                                                                             Year ended                                     Year ended 
                                                                                                       31 December 2018                        31 December 2017 

Within 1 year

Later than 1 year and less than 5 years

After 5 years

Property
£’000

10,065

35,339

61,707

107,111

Vehicles and
 equipment
£’000

352

94

-

446

Property
£’000

11,560

41,739

69,906

123,205

Vehicles and 
 equipment 
£’000 

362 

38 

- 

400 

129

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

30. Commitments and contingencies (continued) 

Operating leases – Group as lessor 

The Group has entered into non-cancellable operating leases, as lessor, on property included in investment property. The terms 
of these leases vary. 

Future minimum lease payments receivable for property under non-cancellable operating leases are as set out below. 

Within 1 year

Between 1 and 5 years

After 5 years

2018
£’000

378

1,314

1,777

3,469

2017 
£’000 

593 

1,520 

2,057 

4,170 

31. Related party transactions 

Key management compensation is given in Note 10 ‘Employees and Directors’. 

During 2018 and 2017 the Directors were members of an employee car ownership scheme under which the following transactions 
were made in the year. The Directors purchased 19 cars in 2018 (2017:15) at a price of £1,338,000 (2017: £1,170,000) and sold 
back 22 (2017:12) at a price of £1,532,000 (2017: £938,000). The Directors did not make a profit on these transactions. 

The following table shows the aggregate transactions with companies within Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited other 
than those which are subsidiaries of Marshall Motor Holdings plc. 

2018

Ultimate parent undertaking 

  Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited

Other related parties 

  Marshall of Cambridge Aerospace Limited

  Marshall Thermo King Limited

  Marshall Group Properties Limited

2017

Ultimate parent undertaking 

  Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited

Other related parties 

  Marshall of Cambridge Aerospace Limited

  Marshall Thermo King Limited

  Marshall Fleet Solutions Limited

  Marshall Group Properties Limited

  Aeropeople Limited

  Marshall Land Systems Limited

130

Sales
£’000

Purchases
£’000

Year-end 
 balance 
£’000 

52

16

296

(89)

275

606

254

3

1,112

1,975

1 

(39) 

27 

- 

(11) 

Sales
£’000

Purchases
£’000

Year-end 
 balance 
£’000 

278

62

327

3

100

2

3

775

332

303

3

8

1,335

-

-

2 

(37) 

254 

- 

(368) 

- 

- 

1,981

(149) 

Marshall Motor Holdings plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

31. Related party transactions (continued) 

Outstanding balances with group entities are unsecured, interest free and are expected to be settled in cash. During the year 
ended 31 December 2018, the Group has not made any provision for doubtful debts relating to amounts owed by related parties 
(2017: £nil). 

32. Pensions 

a) Defined contribution pension schemes 

The Group makes contributions to defined contribution pension schemes; contributions paid are calculated by reference to a 
percentage of each employee’s salary. All defined contribution schemes into which the Group makes contributions are managed 
by third party providers. The only obligation of the Group with respect to these schemes is to make the specified contributions. 
The total income statement charge for contributions for the year ended 31 December 2018 was £1,999,000 (2017: £2,059,000). 

The total unpaid pension contributions outstanding at the year end were £313,000 (2017: £263,000). 

b) Defined benefit pension schemes 

The defined benefit section of the Marshall Group Executive Pension Plan (“the Plan”) has multiple participating entities which 
are under common control. There is no contractual agreement or stated policy for charging the net defined benefit pension cost 
for the Plan as a whole to the various participating employers of the Plan. Therefore, in line with the disclosure requirements of 
IAS 19 Employee Benefits, the net defined benefit cost is recognised in the financial statements of the principal employer (Marshall 
of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited) and the other participating employers (including the Group) recognise a cost equal to their 
contributions payable for the year. Consequently, the Group accounts for all of its pension contributions as if the contributions 
were made to a defined contribution pension scheme (see Note 2 ‘Accounting Policies’). 

The most recent triennial actuarial valuation of the defined benefit section of the Plan is as at 31 December 2016. The valuation 
was agreed by the Trustees after the Group’s year end and revealed a global, scheme-wide deficit on a technical provisions 
basis of £8.1 million. As a result, a recovery plan was put in place to which the Group, as a participating employer, was required 
to contribute. 

The Group’s only contributions to the defined benefit section of the Plan during the current year was a payment of £420,000 due 
under the recovery plan (2017: £nil). 

Cessation of  Participation in the Plan and Provision for Section 75 Employer Debt 

Following the sale of Marshall Leasing Limited in 2017, the Group no longer had any current employees who were members of 
the defined benefit section of the Plan. As a result of the Group’s strategic review of its existing pension arrangements, on 
31 December 2018 the Group ceased to be a participating employer in the Plan as a result of it no longer employing any active 
members of the defined contribution section of the Plan. Accordingly, on 31 December 2018, a debt was triggered under Section 
75 of the Pension Act 1995 on the Group (“Employer Debt”). 

On 7 February 2019 the Plan’s actuary issued a certificate for the purposes of Regulation 5(18) and Regulation 6(8) of the 
Occupational Pension Schemes (Employer Debt) Regulations 2005 confirming that the Employer Debt at 31 December 2018 
was £5,541,000. 

On 25 February 2019 the Group paid the Employer Debt (together with Trustee expenses of £25,000) to the Trustees of the Plan 
and entered in to a Deed of De-Adherence with the Trustees and Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited confirming the discharge 
of the Group from the trusts of the Plan and from any further obligations in relation to the Plan with effect from that date. Accordingly, 
with effect from that date, the Group has no further commitments or participation in any defined benefit pension plans. 

The Group recognised a provision of £6,000,000 in its financial statements for the year ending 31 December 2017 in respect of 
the estimated costs (including the Employer Debt) of it ceasing to be a participating employer of the Plan. 

131

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

32. Pensions (continued) 

Principal Employer’s IAS 19 Disclosures 

Details of the full scheme are included in the Annual Report and Accounts of Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited which 
can be obtained from: Airport House, The Airport, Cambridge CB5 8RY. 

33. Acquisition of  non-controlling interest in subsidiaries 

On 22 February 2018, the Group acquired the remaining 1% of the share capital of the following subsidiary undertakings; Marshall 
of Peterborough Limited, Marshall of Ipswich Limited and Marshall of Stevenage Limited, taking the Group’s shareholdings in 
these entities up to 100%. Total consideration for these shares amounted to £49,553; the value of consideration in excess of the 
carrying value of the non-controlling interest acquired has been recognised in retained earnings. 

34. Ultimate parent company 

The parent undertaking of the largest group of undertakings for which consolidated financial statements are drawn up and of 
which the Company is a member is Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited. This is both the immediate parent undertaking 
and the ultimate parent undertaking. In light of its aggregate shareholding in the capital of the Company, Marshall of Cambridge 
(Holdings) Limited has entered into a relationship agreement in order to regulate the relationship between it and the Company 
and enable the Company to act independently of Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited and its affiliates. 

Copies of the consolidated financial statements for Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited can be obtained from: Airport 
House, The Airport, Cambridge CB5 8RY.

132

Company Financial Statements

Balance Sheet 
at 31 December 2018 

Fixed assets

Investments

Current assets

Debtors

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

Net current liabilities

Net assets

Capital and reserves

Called-up share capital

Share premium

Share-based payment reserve

Own shares reserve

Profit and loss account

Shareholders’ funds

Marshall Motor Holdings Plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Note

2018
£’000

2017 
£’000 

6

7

9

10

161,886 

163,528  

6,317 

6,317 

(38,880)

(32,563)

129,323 

49,834 

19,672 

1,570 

- 

58,247 

129,323 

6,265  

6,265  

(30,499) 

(24,234) 

139,294  

49,531  

19,672  

2,608  

-  

67,483  

139,294  

The  total  comprehensive  loss  of  the  Company  for  the  year  ended  31  December  2018  was  £4,757,000  (2017:  income  of 
£54,208,000). 

The Company financial statements were approved for issue by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 12 March 2019. 

Richard Blumberger 
Chief Financial Officer 

133

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Company Financial Statements

Statement of  Changes in Equity 
For the year ended 31 December 2018 

                                                                                                                 Share- 
                                                              Called-up                                   based               Own      Profit and 
                                                                     share             Share      payments           shares                loss 
                                                                   Capital       Premium          reserve          reserve         account               Total 
                                                Note              £’000              £’000              £’000              £’000              £’000              £’000 

At 1 January 2017                                      49,531            19,672              1,869                      -            17,802            88,874  

Profit for the financial year                                    -                      -                      -                      -            54,208            54,208  

Total comprehensive  
income for the year                                             -                      -                      -                      -            54,208            54,208  

Equity dividends paid                                            -                      -                      -                      -             (4,527)           (4,527) 

Share-based payment charge                               -                      -                 739                      -                      -                 739  

At 31 December 2017                                49,531            19,672              2,608                      -            67,483          139,294  

Loss for the financial year                                     -                      -                      -                      -             (4,757)           (4,757) 

Total comprehensive  
loss for the year                                                   -                      -                      -                      -             (4,757)           (4,757) 

Equity dividends paid                   12                      -                      -                      -                      -             (4,983)           (4,983) 

Issue of share capital                                       303                      -                      -                (303)                    -                      -  

Exercise of share options                                      -                      -             (1,567)                303                 504                (760) 

Share-based payment charge                               -                      -                 529                      -                      -                 529  

At 31 December 2018                                49,834            19,672              1,570                      -            58,247          129,323  

134

                                                                                                                                                                                                 
 
Marshall Motor Holdings Plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Company Financial Statements

1. Statement of  compliance 

Marshall Motor Holdings plc (the Company) is incorporated and resident in the United Kingdom. The Company is a public limited 
company, limited by shares, whose shares are listed on the Alternative Investment Market (AIM) of the London Stock Exchange. 
The Company is registered in England and Wales under the Companies Act 2006 (registration number 02051461) with the address 
of the registered office being; Airport House, The Airport, Cambridge, CB5 8RY, United Kingdom.  

The parent company financial statements have been prepared in compliance with FRS 102, the Financial Reporting Standard 
applicable in the United Kingdom and the Republic of Ireland and in accordance with the Companies Act 2006. 

2. Basis of  preparation 

The financial statements are prepared in Sterling which is both the functional and presentational currency of the Company and all 
values are rounded to the nearest thousand pounds (£’000) except where otherwise indicated. The financial information has been 
prepared on the going concern and historical cost basis. 

The Company is part of the consolidated financial statements of Marshall Motor Holdings plc. 

Exemptions adopted 

The following disclosure exemptions have been adopted as permitted by FRS 102: 

Financial instrument-related disclosures 

– Presentation of a cash-flow statement and related notes 
–
– Key management personnel compensation disclosures 
– Share-based payments disclosures 

Company profit 

As permitted under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the Company has elected to neither present a Company Income 
Statement nor Company Statement of Comprehensive Income. 

3. Accounting policies 

Except where disclosed otherwise in this note, the accounting policies adopted in the preparation of the Company financial 
statements  are  consistent  with  those  applied  when  preparing  the  Company  financial  statements  for  the  year  ended 
31 December 2017. 

Investments in subsidiaries 

Investments  in  subsidiaries  are  recognised  at  cost  less  any  impairment.  Impairments  are  recognised  directly  through  the 
Income Statement. 

Taxation 

Current taxation 
Current tax is recognised for the amount of income tax payable in respect of the taxable profit for the current or past reporting 
periods using the tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the reporting date. 

Deferred taxation 
Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all timing differences which are differences between taxable profits and total comprehensive 
income that arise from the inclusion of income and expenses in tax assessments in periods different from those in which they are 
recognised in the financial statements. There are the following exceptions.

135

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Company Financial Statements

3. Accounting policies (continued) 

Taxation (continued) 

Deferred taxation (continued) 
Where, in a business combination, there are differences between amounts that can be deducted for tax for assets (other than 
goodwill) and liabilities compared with the amounts that are recognised in the financial statements for those assets and liabilities, 
a deferred tax liability or asset is recognised. The amount attributed to goodwill is adjusted by the amount of the deferred tax 
recognised. 

Unrelieved tax losses and other deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that it is considered probable that they will 
be  recovered  against  the  reversal  of  deferred  tax  liabilities  or  other  future  taxable  profits.  Deferred  tax  is  measured  on  an 
undiscounted basis at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which timing differences reverse, based on tax 
rates and laws enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. 

With the exception of changes arising on the initial recognition of a business combination, the taxation charge or credit is presented 
either in the income statement or the statement of other comprehensive income depending on the transaction that resulted in the 
taxation charge or credit. 

Deferred tax liabilities are presented within provisions for liabilities and deferred tax assets within debtors. Deferred tax assets and 
deferred tax liabilities are offset only if: 

–
–

the company has a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax liabilities, and 
the deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority on either the 
same taxable entity or different taxable entities which intend either to settle current tax liabilities and assets on a net basis, or 
to realise the assets and settle the liabilities simultaneously. 

Financial instruments 

The Company has non-derivative financial instruments comprising trade and other receivables, cash and cash equivalents, loans 
and borrowings and trade and other payables. 

The Company has no financial instruments measured at fair value. 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at banks and in hand. 

Short-term debtors and creditors  

Debtors and creditors with no stated interest rate and which are receivable or payable within one year are recorded at transaction 
price. Any losses arising from impairment are recognised in the Income Statement. 

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings 

All interest-bearing loans and borrowings are initially recognised at the present value of cash payable to the bank (including interest). 
After initial recognition they are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method, less impairment. The effective 
interest rate amortisation is included in the Income Statement. 

Share-based payments 

The  Company  operates  a  number  of  equity-settled,  share-based  compensation  plans  through  which  the  Company  allows 
employees to receive shares in the Company. 

Equity-settled share-based payments are measured at fair value (calculated excluding the effect of service and non-market based 
performance vesting conditions) at the date of grant. The share-based payment charge to be expensed is determined by reference 
to  the  fair  value  of  share  options  granted  and  is  recognised  as  an  employee  expense  within  underlying  earnings,  with  a 
corresponding increase in equity.  

136

Marshall Motor Holdings Plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Company Financial Statements
3. Accounting policies (continued) 

Share-based payments (continued) 

The share-based payment charge is recognised on a straight-line basis over the vesting period (being the period over which all 
vesting conditions are to be satisfied). An award subject to graded vesting is accounted for as though it were multiple, separate 
awards, the number of awards being determined in direct correlation to the number of instalments in which the options vest. 

The share-based payment charge is based on the Company’s estimate of the number of options that are expected to vest. At 
each balance sheet date, the Company revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected to vest based on the  
non-market performance vesting conditions and service conditions. The Company’s remuneration policy gives the Remuneration 
Committee discretion to revise performance conditions to adjust for the impact of group restructurings and reorganisations on 
incentive outcomes. The impact of any revisions to original vesting estimates or performance conditions is recognised in the Income 
Statement with a corresponding adjustment to equity. 

Social security contributions payable in connection with share options granted are considered to be an integral part of the grant 
and are treated as cash-settled transactions. Cash-settled share-based payments transactions are measured at fair value at the 
settlement date, with changes in fair value recognised directly in equity in retained earnings. 

When options are exercised, the Company issues new shares. These shares are gifted to the Employee Benefit Trust by the 
Company at nominal value. The cost of these shares is recognised as a reduction to equity in the own shares reserve. When the 
options are exercised and the shares transferred to the employees, the cost on the own shares reserve is transferred to equity. 

When options issued by the Employee Benefit Trust are exercised the own shares reserve is reduced and a gain or loss is 
recognised in the reserves based on proceeds less weighted-average cost of shares initially purchased now exercised. 

Where shares options are forfeited, effective from the date of the forfeiture, any share-based payment charge previously recognised 
in both the current and prior periods in relation to these options is reversed though the Income Statement with a corresponding 
adjustment to equity.  

The cost of awards granted to employees of the Company’s subsidiaries is recognised as an addition to the cost of its investment 
in the employing subsidiary, with a corresponding increase in the Share-Based Payments Reserve in the Statement of Changes 
in Equity.  

Pensions 

The Company participates in a defined contribution scheme for its employees. Contributions are charged to the Income Statement 
as they become payable in accordance with the rules of the scheme. 

Dividend distribution 

Final dividends to the Company’s shareholders are recognised as a liability in the financial statements in the period in which the 
dividends are approved by the Company’s shareholders. Interim dividends are recognised when they are paid. 

Dividend income 

Income is recognised when the Company’s right to receive the payment is established, which is generally when shareholders 
approve the dividend. All of the Company’s income is generated in the UK. 

4. Auditor’s remuneration 

The auditor’s remuneration for audit and other services was £3,000 (2017: £3,000). 

137

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Company Financial Statements

5. Employees and directors 

Employee costs for the Company during the year: 

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Other pension costs

Share based payments

The average number of employees (including Executive Directors) was: 

Management

2018
£’000

1,337 

412 

101 

583 

2017 
£’000 

2,098  

454  

115  

633  

2,433 

3,300  

2018
No.

3 

3 

2017 
No. 

3  

3  

Details  of  the  remuneration  of  the  Directors,  their  share  incentives  and  pension  entitlements  are  set  out  in  the  Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on pages 53 to 60. 

6.

Investments in subsidiaries 

Cost

At 1 January 2018

Acquisition of minority interest shareholding

Share-based payment awards to employees of subsidiaries

Impairment

At 31 December 2018

2018 
£’000 

163,528  

50  

84  

(1,776) 

161,886  

On 22 February 2018, the Company acquired the remaining 1% of the share capital of the following subsidiary undertakings; 
Marshall  of  Peterborough  Limited,  Marshall  of  Ipswich  Limited  and  Marshall  of  Stevenage  Limited,  taking  the  Company’s 
shareholdings in these entities up to 100%. Total consideration for these shares amounted to £49,553; the value of consideration 
in excess the carrying value of the non-controlling interest acquired has been recognised as an addition to Investments in 
Subsidiaries.  

Management has recognised an impairment charge of £1,776,000 in the current year against investments in subsidiaries with a 
carrying amount of £12,946,000 as at 31 December 2017. The impairment charge is recorded within administrative expenses in 
the Income Statement. The impairments recorded are a consequence of the continuing deterioration in market conditions resulting 
in revised assumptions around future profitability and growth rates within certain brands 

The Company owns directly or indirectly the whole of the issued and fully paid ordinary share capital of the following subsidiary 
undertakings. All subsidiaries are incorporated in England and Wales and are 100% owned except where referenced. 

The registered office for all subsidiary companies listed above is Airport House, The Airport, Cambridge, CB5 8RY, United Kingdom. 
All subsidiaries listed below are included within the consolidated financial statements on pages 72 to 132. 

138

 
Marshall Motor Holdings Plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

6.

Investments in subsidiaries (continued) 

Name of  Undertaking
Marshall Motor Group Limited
Marshall of Cambridge (Garage Properties) Limited
Tim Brinton Cars Limited* (reg no. 01041301)
Marshall of Ipswich Limited*
Marshall of Peterborough Limited*
S.G. Smith Holdings Limited
S.G. Smith Automotive Limited* (reg no. 00622112)
S.G. Smith (Motors) Limited* (reg no. 00287379)
S.G. Smith (Motors) Beckenham Limited* (reg no. 00648395)
S.G. Smith (Motors) Forest Hill Limited* (reg no. 00581710)
S.G. Smith (Motors) Crown Point Limited* (reg no. 00581711)
S.G. Smith (Motors) Sydenham Limited* (reg no. 00660066)
S.G. Smith (Motors) Croydon Limited
S.G. Smith Trade Parts Limited* (reg no. 01794317)
Prep-Point Limited* (reg no. 00660067)
Marshall of Stevenage Limited*
Marshall Commercial Vehicles Limited
Marshall North West Limited
Marshall of Scunthorpe Limited* (reg no. 01174004)
Silver Street Automotive Limited 
Exeter Trade Parts Specialists LLP* (reg no. OC329331)
Audi South West Limited
Hanjo Russell Limited
CMG 2007 Limited* (reg no. 06275636)
Astle Limited* (reg no. 01114983)
Crystal Motor Group Limited* (reg no. 04813767)
Ridgeway Garages (Newbury) Limited
Pentagon Limited
Pentagon South West Limited
Ridgeway TPS Limited
Ridgeway Bavarian Limited
Wood in Hampshire Limited
Wood of Salisbury Limited

Principal activity  
at period end 
Franchised motor dealership 
Property holding 
Property holding 
Franchised motor dealership 
Franchised motor dealership 
Holding company 
Holding company 
Property holding 
Franchised motor dealership 
Franchised motor dealership 
Franchised motor dealership 
Franchised motor dealership 
Dormant 
Motor parts sales 
Maintenance and repair of motor vehicles 
Franchised motor dealership 
Dormant 
Franchised motor dealership 
Franchised motor dealership 
Franchised motor dealership 
Motor parts sales 
Dormant 
Dormant 
Holding company 
Franchised motor dealership 
Franchised motor dealership 
Franchised motor dealership 
Franchised motor dealership 
Dormant 
Motor parts sales 
Franchised motor dealership 
Dormant 
Dormant 

*  subsidiaries  for  which  exemption  from  audit  by  virtue  of   s479A  of   the  Companies  Act  2006  has  been  taken  for  the  year  ended 
31 December 2018. 

7. Debtors 

Amounts owed by Group undertakings

Other debtors

VAT

Prepayments and accrued income

Deferred tax asset (note 8)

2018
£’000

5,567 

603 

21 

113 

13 

2017 
£’000 

5,371  

186  

56  

552  

100  

6,317 

6,265  

Amounts owed by group undertakings are unsecured, bear no interest and have no fixed repayment date. 

139

 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

8. Deferred tax assets  

The analysis and movements in deferred tax assets during the year are as follows: 

Deferred tax assets

At 1 January 2017

Credited to the income statement - current year

(Charged)/credit to the income statement - prior year

At 31 December 2017

Charged to the income statement - current year

Charged to the income statement - prior year

At 31 December 2018

Share-
based
payments
£’000

Other 
temporary 
differences
£’000

307

- 

(307)

- 

- 

- 

- 

5

66

29

100

(82)

(5)

13 

Total 
£’000 

312 

66 

(278) 

100 

(82) 

(5) 

13  

The Directors believe that all dividends paid by the Company’s subsidiaries will meet the exemption conditions set out in tax 
legislation and are non-taxable income. 

9. Creditors: amounts falling due within one year 

Bank overdraft

Trade creditors

Amounts owed to Group undertakings

Corporation tax

Other taxes and social security

Other creditors

Accruals and deferred income

2018
£’000

4,274 

735 

30,775 

1,490 

63 

354 

1,189 

38,880 

Amounts owed to group undertakings are unsecured, bear no interest and have no fixed repayment date. 

10. Called-up share capital 

77,865,653 (2017: 77,392,862) ordinary shares of 64p each

Ordinary shares

At 1 January

Issued on 11 April 2018

2018
£’000

49,834 

2018
£’000

49,531 

303 

49,834 

2017 
£’000 

6,390  

77  

20,561  

1,554  

60  

-  

1,857  

30,499  

2017 
£’000 

49,531 

2017 
£’000 

49,531  

-  

49,531  

On 11 April 2018 472,791 ordinary shares of 64p each were issued as part of the exercise of share options awarded under the 
IPO Restricted and IPO Performance share option schemes. There were no shares issued in 2017.  

140

Marshall Motor Holdings Plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

11. Share-based payments 

The Company operates a share-based payment scheme; having adopted the disclosure exemptions permitted by FRS 102, full 
details of the scheme are included in Note 29 ‘Share-Based Payments’ of the consolidated financial statements and are not 
duplicated here. 

The share-based payment expense recognised by the Company is calculated by reference to the number of options awarded to 
the employees of the Company. 

12. Dividends 

Paid during the year

Final dividend for 2016

Interim dividend for 2017

Final dividend for 2017

Interim dividend for 2018

2018
£’000

- 

- 

3,309 

1,674 

4,983 

2017 
£’000 

2,864  

1,663  

-  

-  

4,527  

A final dividend of £3,309,000 (2016: £2,864,000) for the year ended 31 December 2017 was paid in May 2018. This represented 
a payment of 4.25p per ordinary share in issue at that time. 

An interim dividend in respect of the year ended 31 December 2018 of £1,674,000 (2017: £1,663,000), representing a payment 
of 2.15p per ordinary share in issue at that time, was paid in September 2018. 

A final dividend of 6.39p per share in respect of the year ended 31 December 2018 is to be proposed at the annual general meeting 
on 21 May 2019. The ex-dividend date will be 25 April 2019 and the associated record date will be 26 April 2019. This dividend will 
be paid subject to shareholder approval on 24 May 2019 and these financial statements do not reflect this final dividend payable. 

13. Pensions 

As described in Note 3 ‘Accounting Policies’, the Company participates in a pension scheme for the benefits of its employees 
which is a defined contribution scheme. The scheme is funded by the payment of contributions to a trustee administered fund 
which is kept independently from the assets of the participating employers. 

The total pension cost for the year was £101,000 (2017: £115,000) 

The total unpaid pension contributions outstanding at the year end were £3,000 (2017: £3,000) 

14. Related party transactions 

Company transactions with subsidiaries 

The Company has taken advantage of exemption, under the terms of Section 33 of FRS 102, not to disclose related party 
transactions with subsidiaries within the Group. 

Transactions with Directors  

Details of transactions with Directors are included in Note 31 ‘Related Party Transactions’ of the consolidated financial statements. 

141

 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

15. Ultimate parent company 

The parent undertaking of the largest group of undertakings for which group financial statements are drawn up and of which the 
Company is a member is Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited. This is considered to be the ultimate parent company. 

Copies of the group financial statements for Marshall of Cambridge (Holdings) Limited can be obtained from Airport House, The 
Airport, Cambridge CB5 8RY. 

142

Marshall Motor Holdings Plc  |  Annual Report & Accounts 2018

Appendix – Alternative Performance Measures (APMs)

The Group presents various APMs as the Directors believe that these are useful for users of the financial statements in helping to 
provide a balanced view of, and relevant information on, the Group’s financial performance.  The APMs are measures which 
disclose the adjusted performance of the Group excluding specific items which are regarded as non-recurring. See Note 7 
‘Non-Underlying Items’ for full details of the nature of items excluded from non-underlying performance measures. 

The following table shows the reconciliation between the Group’s performance as reported in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRS) and the Group’s underlying performance and like-for-like results. 

2018
£'000

2017 
£'000 

        25,066 

        20,097  

- 

(3,217)

(268)

1,146

9,302

6,963

32,029

2018
£'000

6,000 

6,783 

-  

-  

-  

12,783 

32,880 

2017 
£'000 

   2,186,887 

   2,231,979  

(36,334)

(15,908)

- 

(4,437) 

(67,772) 

(50,859) 

(52,242)

(123,068) 

2,134,645

2,108,911 

2018
£'000

2017 
£'000 

      255,677 

      258,301  

(3,537)

(1,623)

(5,160)

(617) 

(6,538) 

(7,155) 

250,517

251,146 

Continuing operating profit

Total continuing operating profit as reported

Impact of  non-underlying items 

  Post-retirement benefits charge

  Restructuring costs and provisions

  Profit on disposal of assets classified as held for sale

  Loss on disposal of investment property

  Loss on impairment of goodwill and other intangible assets

Continuing underlying operating profit

Continuing revenue

Total continuing revenue as reported

Impact of  non like-for-like activities 

  New dealerships acquired or opened in the year

  Dealerships closed in the year

  Business activities ceased in the year

Continuing like-for-like revenue

Continuing gross profit 

Total continuing gross profit as reported

Impact of  non like-for-like activities 

  New dealerships acquired or opened in the year

  Dealerships closed in the year

Continuing like-for-like gross profit 

143

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SHAREHOLDERS INFORMATION

Company Information

Registered Office:

Company websites: 

Airport House 
The Airport 
Cambridge  
CB5 8RY 

www.mmhplc.com 
www.marshall.co.uk 

Nominated Adviser and Broker:

Investec Bank plc 
30 Gresham Street London EC2V 7QP 

Auditor:

Joint Bankers: 

Ernst & Young LLP 
One Cambridge Business Park 
Cambridge CB4 0WZ 

Barclays Bank plc 
1 Churchill Place London E14 5HP 

HSBC Bank plc 
8 Canada Square London E145HQ 

Legal Advisers to the Company: 

Dentons UKMEA LLP 
One Fleet Place London EC4M 7WS 

Registrar: 

Link Market Services Limited 
The Registry 
34 Beckenham Road 
Beckenham 
Kent  
BR3 4TU

144

Perivan Financial Print  253348

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Volkswagen I.D. BUZZ CARGO

Hyundai i30 Fastback

Nissan LEAF

smart forease

Audi 
BMW 
BMW Motorrad 
CUPRA 
Ford 
Ford Vans 
Honda 
Hyundai 
Jaguar 
Kia 
Land Rover 
Maserati 
Mercedes-Benz 
Mercedes-Benz Commercials 
MINI 
Nissan 
Peugeot 
Seat 
SKODA 
Smart  
Vauxhall  
Volkswagen 
Volkswagen Commercials 
Volvo 
Paint & Body Repair Centres 
Trade Parts Specialists 
Used Car Centres 

23 BRAND PARTNERS 
120 OPERATING UNITS  
27 COUNTIES NATIONWIDE

www.mmhplc.com
Marshall Motor Holdings plc 
Airport House, The Airport, Cambridge, CB5 8RY 

© 2019 Marshall Motor Holdings plc